FCC ID: O9PELPS01 Spread spectrum transmitter with input / output de

Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Thank you for your selection of the 905U radio modem. We trust it will give you many years of valuable service. ATTENTION!

Incorrect termination of supply wires may cause internal damage and will void warranty. To ensure your 905U enjoys a long life, double check ALL your connections with the users manual before turning the power on. CAUTION:

To comply with FCC RF Exposure requirements in section 1.1310 of the FCC Rules, antennas used with this device must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons to satisfy RF exposure compliance. DO NOT:

operate the transmitter when someone is within 20 cm of the antenna operate the transmitter unless all RF connectors are secure and any open connectors are properly terminated. operate the equipment near electrical blasting caps or in an explosive atmosphere All equipment must be properly grounded for safe operations. All equipment should be serviced only by a qualified technician. Page 2 March 2000 Contents FCC Notice:

This users manual is for the ELPRO series radio telemetry module. This device complies with Part 15.247 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) 2) This device may not cause harmful interference and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device must be operated as supplied by ELPRO Technologies Pty Ltd. Any changes or modifications made to the device without the written consent of ELPRO Technologies Pty. Ltd. May void the users authority to operate the device. End user products that have this device embedded must be supplied with non-standard antenna connectors, and antennas available from vendors specified by ELPRO Technologies. Please contact ELPRO Technologies for end user antenna and connector recommendations. Notices:

Safety:

Exposure to RF energy is an important safety consideration. The FCC has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC regulated equipment as a result of its actions in General Docket 79-144 on March 13, 1996. CAUTION:

To comply with FCC RF Exposure requirements in section 1.1310 of the FCC Rules, antennas used with this device must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons to satisfy RF exposure compliance. DO NOT:

operate the transmitter when someone is within 20 cm of the antenna operate the transmitter unless all RF connectors are secure and any open connectors are properly terminated. operate the equipment near electical blasting caps or in an explosive atmosphere All equipment must be properly grounded for safe operations. All equipment should be serviced only by a qualified technician. man_905_2.1.doc Page 3 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual How to Use This Manual To receive the maximum benefit from your product, please read the Introduction, Installation and Operation chapters of this manual thoroughly before putting the to work. Chapter Four Configuration explains how to configure the modules using the Configuration Software available. For configuration using the on-board switches, refer to the separate Switch Configuration Manual. Chapter Five Specifications details the features of the product and lists the standards to which the product is approved. Chapter Six Troubleshooting will help if your system has problems and Chapter Seven specifies the Warranty and Service conditions. The foldout sheet Installation Guide is an installation drawing appropriate for most applications. Warning !

1. For U modules, a radio licence is not required in most countries, provided the module is installed using the aerial and equipment configuration described in the Installation Guide. Check with your local distributor for further information on regulations. 2. 3. 4. For U modules, operation is authorised by the radio frequency regulatory authority in your country on a non-protection basis. Although all care is taken in the design of these units, there is no responsibility taken for sources of external interference. The intelligent communications protocol aims to correct communication errors due to interference and to retransmit the required output conditions regularly. However some delay in the operation of outputs may occur during periods of interference. Systems should be designed to be tolerant of these delays. To avoid the risk of electrocution, the aerial, aerial cable, serial cables and all terminals of the module should be electrically protected. To provide maximum surge and lightning protection, the module should be connected to a suitable earth and the aerial, aerial cable, serial cables and the module should be installed as recommended in the Installation Guide. To avoid accidents during maintenance or adjustment of remotely controlled equipment, all equipment should be first disconnected from the module during these adjustments. Equipment should carry clear markings to indicate remote or automatic operation. E.g.

"This equipment is remotely controlled and may start without warning. Isolate at the switchboard before attempting adjustments."

5. The module is not suitable for use in explosive environments without additional protection. Page 4 March 2000 Contents CONTENTS CHAPTER ONE INTRODUCTION.....................................................................................................................................7 1.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................................7 CHAPTER TWO INSTALLATION................................................................................................................................... 10 2.3 2.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................................................10 10101010POWER SUPPLY ...............................................................................................................................................10 AC Supply..................................................................................................................................................... 11 2.2.1 DC Supply .................................................................................................................................................... 11 2.2.2 2.2.3 Solar Supply ................................................................................................................................................ 12 2.2.4 Multiple Modules........................................................................................................................................ 12 24V Regulated Supply ............................................................................................................................... 13 2.2.5 INPUT / OUTPUT .....................................................................................................................................................13 Digital Inputs (Error! Bookmark not defined.-1 and Error! Bookmark not defined.-2)............... 13 2.3.1 Digital Outputs (Error! Bookmark not defined.-1).............................................................................. 14 2.3.2 Digital Outputs (Error! Bookmark not defined.-2 and Error! Bookmark not defined.-3)............ 16 2.3.3 Analogue Inputs (Error! Bookmark not defined.-1 and Error! Bookmark not defined.-2).......... 16 2.3.4 Analogue Outputs (Error! Bookmark not defined.-1 and Error! Bookmark not defined.-3)....... 17 2.3.5 Pulse Input (Error! Bookmark not defined.-1)..................................................................................... 17 2.3.6 Pulse Inputs (Error! Bookmark not defined.-2)................................................................................... 17 2.3.7 Pulse Output (Error! Bookmark not defined.-1)................................................................................... 18 2.3.8 2.3.9 Pulse Output (Error! Bookmark not defined.-3)................................................................................... 18 2.3.10 RS232 Serial Port....................................................................................................................................... 18 2.3.11 RS485 Serial Port....................................................................................................................................... 19 CHAPTER THREE............................................................................................................................................. OPERATION 22 3.1 3.2 POWER-UP AND NORMAL OPERATION...............................................................................................................22 Communications......................................................................................................................................... 22 Change of state conditions....................................................................................................................... 24 Analogue Set-points................................................................................................................................... 26 Start-up Poll ................................................................................................................................................ 27 Communications Failure (CF)................................................................................................................. 27 Resetting Outputs........................................................................................................................................ 27 SYSTEM DESIGN TIPS.............................................................................................................................................27 System Dynamics......................................................................................................................................... 27 Radio Channel Capacity........................................................................................................................... 28 Radio Path Reliability............................................................................................................................... 28 Design for Failures..................................................................................................................................... 29 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4 3.1.5 3.1.6 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 CHAPTER FOUR.....................................................................................................................................CONFIGURATION 30 4.1 4.2 4.3 INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................................................30 EASY CONFIGURATION USING DEFAULT SETTINGS.........................................................................................31 ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED. CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE ...............................................................33 Hardware Requirements............................................................................................................................ 33 4.3.1 Installation................................................................................................................................................... 34 4.3.2 Software Operation .................................................................................................................................... 34 4.3.3 4.3.4 Changing User Options.................................................................................................................................. 38 4.3.5 Programming / Downloading Configuration........................................................................................ 40 CHAPTER FIVE SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................................................................ 42 CHAPTER SIX..................................................................................................................................TROUBLESHOOTING man_905_2.1.doc Page 5 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual 45 6.1 DIAGNOSTICS CHART .............................................................................................................................................45 SELF TEST FUNCTIONS..........................................................................................................................................45 6.2 Input to Output Reflection (105-1 only)................................................................................................ 45 Radio Testing using Tone Reversals ....................................................................................................... 46 Diagnostics menu........................................................................................................................................ 46 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 CHAPTER SEVEN......................................................................................................................WARRANTY & SERVICE 52 APPENDIX A SYSTEM EXAMPLE................................................................................................................................... 53 Page 6 March 2000 Chapter One Introduction Chapter One INTRODUCTION 1.1 General The range of telemetry modules has been designed to provide standard off-the-shelf telemetry functions, for an economical price. Telemetry is the transmission of signals over a long distance via a medium such as radio or twisted-pair wire. Although the is intended to be simple in its application, it also provides many sophisticated features. This manual should be read carefully to ensure that the modules are configured and installed to give reliable performance. The unit can monitor and control the following types of signals:

Digital on/off signals Example outputs - motor run, siren on Example inputs - motor fault, tank overflow, intruder alarm Analogue continuously variable signals (0-20mA) Example outputs - tank level indication, required motor speed Example inputs - measured tank level, actual motor speed Pulse frequency signals Examples - electricity metering, fluid flow Internal Status signals Examples - analogue battery voltage, power status, solar panel status and low battery status. The unit will monitor the input signals and transmit the signal information by radio or RS485 twisted pair to another module. At the remote unit, the signals will be reproduced as digital, analogue or pulse output signals. The also provides analogue set points, so that a digital output may be configured to turn on and off depending on the value of an analogue input. The pulse I/O transmits an accumulated value and the pulses are reliably recreated at the remote unit regardless of missed transmissions. The actual pulse rate is also calculated and is available as a remote analogue output. This manual covers the U and 105S modules. We have provided a summary on all products available in the telemetry range, below. U-1, U-2 and U-3 modules have UHF radio and serial communications. The modules differ only in their input/output (I/O) design, and are compatible, i.e. they can be used to communicate signals to each other in the same network. 105S-1, 105S-2 and 105S-3 modules have only serial communications. All other specifications are as per the U-1, 2 & 3 modules. The 105S modules are compatible with U modules. 105M-1, 105M-2 and 105M-3 modules are for interfacing to MAP27 trunked radio systems. man_905_2.1.doc Page 7 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual These modules can transmit I/O messages hundreds of kilometres via the trunked radio system. 105M-1, 2 and 3 modules differ only in their input/output (I/O) design, and can interface to 105U and 105S modules. For more information, refer to the 105M User Manual. The U-C module provides an interface between host devices such as PLCs or SCADA computers, and a radio telemetry system comprising U and 105S radio telemetry modules. The U-C allows U/105S modules to act as remote wireless I/O for the host devices. For more information, refer to the U-C User Manual. Product naming convention:

1 0 5 a - x where a is:

U = UHF radio + RS232/RS485 serial S = RS232/RS485 serial only M = MAP27 trunked radio interface and x is:

1 = Input / Output module 2 = Input module ( includes one output) 3 = Output module C= Interface module U-1 105S-1 U-2 105S-2 U-3 105S-3

Radio Serial Digital Inputs (DI) Digital Outputs (DO) Analogue Inputs (AI) Analogue Outputs (AO) 4 4 (relay) 2 (4-20mA) 2 (4-20mA) 4 1 (FET) 6 (0-20mA) Pulse Inputs (PI) 1 (100Hz) 4 (1x1KHz, 3x100Hz) Pulse Outputs (PO) 1 (100Hz) Comments PI is DI 1. PO is separate to DO. PIs are the same as POs are the same as DIs. DOs (DO 1-4). The module includes power supply, microprocessor controller, input/output circuits, RS485/232 serial port, and a UHF radio transceiver - no external electronics are required. The U version has both radio and serial port communications. The 105S version does not have a radio and has only serial communications. The U radio frequency has been selected to meet the requirements of Page 8 March 2000 8 (FET) 8 (0-20mA) 4 (100 Hz) Chapter One Introduction unlicensed operation for remote monitoring and control of equipment. That is, a radio licence is not required for the modules in many countries. See Chapter Five Specifications for details. Input signals connected to a module are transmitted to another module and appear as output signals. These input signals may also be configured to appear as inverted signals on the output. A transmission occurs whenever a "change-of-state" occurs on an input signal. A "change-of-state" of a digital or digital internal input is a change from "off" to "on" or vice-versa. A "change-of-state" for an analogue input, internal analogue input or pulse input rate is a change in value of the signal of 3%

(configurable from 0.8 to 50 %). In addition to change-of-state messages, update messages are automatically transmitted on a regular basis. The time period may be configured by the user for each input. This update ensures the integrity of the system. Pulse inputs are accumulated as a pulse count and the accumulated pulse count is transmitted regularly according to the configured update time. The modules transmit the input/output data as a data frame using radio or serial RS485 as the communications medium. The data frame includes the "address" of the transmitting module and the receiving module, so that each transmitted message is acted on only by the correct receiving unit. Each transmitted message also includes error checking to ensure that no corruption of the data frame has occurred due to noise or interference. The module with the correct receiving "address" will acknowledge the message with a return transmission. If the original module does not receive a correct acknowledgement to a transmission, it will retry up to five times before setting the communications fail status of that path. In critical paths, this status can be reflected on an output on the module for alert purposes. The module will continue to try to establish communications and retry, if required, each time an update or change-of-state occurs. A telemetry system may be a complex network or a simple pair of modules. An easy-to-use configuration procedure allows the user to specify any output destination for each input. The maximum number of modules in one system is 95 modules communicating by radio. Each of these modules may have up to 31 other modules connected by RS485 twisted pair. Modules may communicate by radio only, by RS485 only or by both RS485 and radio. Any input signal at any module may be configured to appear at any output on any module in the entire system. Modules can be used as repeaters to re-transmit messages on to the destination module. Repeaters can repeat messages on the radio channel, or from the radio channel to the serial channel (and serial to radio). Up to five repeater addresses may be configured for each input-to-output link. The units may be configured using switches under the plastic cover on the front of the unit or by using a PC connected to the RS232 port. The default configuration is defined in Section 4.2 Easy Configuration Using Default Settings, and software configuration is defined in Section 4.2 Configuration Software. Several standard configurations are also available. These are described in the separate Switch Configuration Manual, available from your distributor. man_905_2.1.doc Page 9 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Chapter Two INSTALLATION 2.1 General The module is housed in a rugged aluminium case, suitable for DIN-rail mounting. Terminals are suitable for cables up to 2.5 sqmm in size. Normal 110/220/240V mains supply should not be connected to any input terminal of the module. Refer to Section 2.3 Power Supply. Before installing a new system, it is preferable to bench test the complete system. Configuration problems are easier to recognise when the system units are adjacent. Following installation, the most common problem is poor communications on the radio channel or the serial channel. For radio modules, problems are caused by incorrectly installed aerials, or radio interference on the same channel, or the radio path being inadequate. If the radio path is a problem (i.e. path too long, or obstructions in the way), then higher performance aerials or a higher mounting point for the aerial may fix the problem. Alternately, use an intermediate module as a repeater. For serial modules, poorly installed serial cable, or interference on the serial cable is a common problem. The foldout sheet Installation Guide provides an installation drawing appropriate to most applications. Further information is detailed below. Each module should be effectively earthed via a "GND" terminal on the module - this is to ensure that the surge protection circuits inside the module are effective. 2.2 Power Supply The power supply is a switch-mode design which will accept either AC or DC supply. The module may also be powered from a solar panel without an external solar regulator. The module accepts supply voltages in the following ranges :

12 - 24 volts AC RMS or 15 - 30 volts DC at the supply terminals, or 10.8 -15 volts DC at the battery terminals. Page 10 March 2000 Chapter Two 2.2.1 AC Supply Installation The AC supply is connected to the "SUP1" and "SUP2" terminals as shown below.

The AC supply should be "floating" relative to earth. A 220-240/16 VAC mains "plug-pack" is available for mains applications. 2.2.2 DC Supply For DC supplies, the positive lead is connected to "SUP1" and the negative to "GND". The positive side of the supply must not be connected to earth. The DC supply may be a floating supply or negatively grounded.

The module may also be powered from an external 11 - 15 VDC battery supply without the need for a "normal" supply connected to "SUP1". This external battery supply is connected to "BAT+"

and "GND" terminals. The positive lead of the external supply should be protected by a 2A fuse. Upon failure of the normal supply, the module may continue to operate for several hours from a backup battery. The module includes battery charging circuits for charging up to a 12 AHr sealed lead acid battery. The battery is connected to the "BAT+" (positive) and "GND" (negative) terminals. The positive lead from the battery should be protected with a 2A fuse, installed as near to the battery terminal as possible. On return of main supply, the unit will switch back to mains operation, and recharge the battery. To provide adequate current to recharge the backup battery, an AC supply of 15V minimum or a DC supply of 17V minimum must be used. Typically, a 6 AHr battery will supply the for 1 - 3 days, depending on I/O loads. man_905_2.1.doc Page 11 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual 2.2.3 Solar Supply The power supply also includes a 12 V solar regulator for connecting 12V solar panels of up to 30W, and solar batteries of up to 100AHr. The unit may not be powered from a solar panel without a battery. An 18W solar panel is sufficient for most solar applications. The size of the solar battery required depends on the I/O used. Batteries are sized for a number of sunless days with 50%

battery capacity remaining as follows:

No. of sunless days = Battery capacity (AHr) x 0.5 Module load (A) x 1.2 x 24 The Module load depends on the I/O connected and can be calculated as follows:

Module Load(A) = 0.07 + (0.01 x No. of DIs) + (0.025 x No. of DOs)

+ (2 x Analogue loop load). The analogue loop load is the total signal current for the AIs and AOs which are powered from the internal 24V supply. Externally powered loops are not included in this. The solar panel is connected to the "SOL" (positive) and "GND" (negative) terminals and the battery connected to the "BAT+" (positive) and "GND" (negative) terminals. Solar panels must be installed and connected as per the panel manufacturer's instructions. The positive lead of the battery should be protected by a 2A fuse installed as near as possible to the battery terminal. Where a solar panel larger than 30W is required, an external solar regulator should be used. 2.2.4 Multiple Modules Where more than one module is installed at the one location, a shared power supply and battery may be used, provided the total load does not exceed the power supply. Page 12 March 2000 Chapter Two Installation The internal power supply of the module can supply a maximum 12V load of 700mA. In order to achieve this, the input power supply must be above 15VAC or 17VDC. Using these figures, it can be determined whether there is enough supply for more than one module - allow 100mA for recharging a battery. For example, assume there is a U-01 module and a 105S-01 module at the same location. The total I/O at the location is 3 analogue inputs, 6 digital inputs and 4 digital outputs. The total load will be :-

TYPE OF LOAD LOAD mA U-01 quiescent 105S-01 quiescent 6 DI @ 10 mA 3 AI @ 20mA x 2 4 DO @ 25mA Battery charging TOTAL 70 45 60 120 100 100 495 So both modules could be powered from one power supply and one battery, provided the external supply voltage is more than 15VAC or 17VDC. 2.2.5 24V Regulated Supply Each module provides a 24V DC regulated supply for analogue loop power. The supply is rated at 150mA, and should only be used for analogue loops. 2.4 Input / Output 2.4.1 Digital Inputs (-1 and -2) man_905_2.1.doc Page 13 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual The -1 and -2 modules each provide four digital inputs with 5000 volt opto-isolation, suitable for voltage free contacts (such as mechanical switches) or NPN transistor devices (such as electronic proximity switches). Contact wetting current of approximately 5mA is provided to maintain reliable operation of driving relays. Each digital input is connected between the appropriate "DI" terminal and common "COM". Each digital input circuit includes a LED indicator which is lit when the digital input is active, that is, when the input circuit is closed. Provided the resistance of the switching device is less than 200 ohms, the device will be able to activate the digital input. For pulse inputs, refer to Section 2.4.6. 2.4.2 Digital Outputs (-1) The -1 module provides four normally open voltage-free relay contacts, rated at AC3 250V/2A, 120V/5A ; AC1 - 250V/5A ; DC - 30V/2A, 20V/5A. These outputs may be used to directly control low-powered equipment, or to power larger relays for higher powered equipment. When driving inductive loads such as AC relays, good installation should include capacitors (e.g. 10nf 250V) across the external circuit to prevent arcing across the relay contacts. For DC inductive loads, flyback diodes should be used to drive DC relays. Page 14 March 2000 Chapter Two Installation Digital outputs may be configured to individually turn off if no command message is received to that output for a certain period. This feature provides an intelligent watch dog for each output, so that a communications failure at a transmitting site causes the output to revert to a known state. See section 4.4 Changing User Options for further details. The output circuit is connected to the appropriate pair of "DO" terminals. Each digital output circuit includes a LED indicator which is lit when the digital output is active. man_905_2.1.doc Page 15 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual 2.4.3 Digital Outputs (-2 and -3) The digital outputs on the -2 and -3 modules are transistor switched DC signals, FET output to common rated at 30VDC 500 mA. The -2 provides one digital output and the -3 provides eight digital outputs. The first four DOs on the -3 module are also the pulse outputs - that is, the first four DO's can be either digital outputs or pulse outputs. The function of each of these outputs may be configured individually. For a description of pulse outputs, refer to Section 2.4.7. Digital outputs may be configured to individually turn off if no command message is received to that output for a certain period. This feature provides an intelligent watch dog for each output, so that a communications failure at a transmitting site causes the output to revert to a known state. See Chapter 4 Configuration for further details. The output circuit is connected to the appropriate pair of "DO" terminals. Each digital output circuit includes a LED indicator which is lit when the digital output is active. 2.4.4 Analogue Inputs (-1 and -2) The -1 module provides two 4 - 20 mA DC analogue inputs for connecting to instrument transducers such as level, moisture, pressure transducers, etc. The -2 module provides six 0 - 20 mA DC analogue inputs. Note that the inputs on the -2 module will measure down to 0mA, so they can also be used for zero based signals such as 0 - 10 mA. Each analogue input has a positive and negative terminal, and may be placed at any point in the current loop, as long as neither input rises above the 24 volt supply level. Each input has a loop resistance of less than 250 ohms and zener diode protection is provided against over-voltage and reverse voltage, however additional protection may be required in high voltage or noisy environments. A 24VDC supply is available on the module for powering the analogue transducer loops. In this case, the analogue loop should be connected between a "AI 1-" terminal and "COM" ( for the first analogue input) or "AI 2-" ( for the second analogue input), and so on for other inputs. The positive terminal ("AI 1+" or "AI 2+", etc) should be connected to "+24V". Externally powered loops may be connected by connecting the input between "AI 1+" and AI 1-

Page 16 March 2000 Chapter Two Installation for analogue input 1 or "AI 2+" and AI 2- for analogue input 2, and so on for other inputs. Analogue Input 1 "AI 1+" may also be configured to control a high/low analogue set-point. See Chapter 4 Configuration for further details. Common mode voltage may be -0.5V to 27V. Shielded cable is recommended for analogue I/O loops to minimise induced noise and Radio Frequency Interference (RFI). The shield of the cable should be connected to earth at one of the cable only. The use of shielded wiring inside an enclosure containing a module is also recommended. 2.4.5 Analogue Outputs (-1 and -3) The -1 module provides two 4 - 20 mA DC analogue outputs for connecting to instrument indicators for the display of remote analogue measurements. The -3 module provides eight 0 - 20 mA DC analogue outputs. Each analogue output is a "sink" to common.

A 24VDC supply is available on the module for powering the analogue output loop (max external loop resistance 1000 ohms). In this case, the analogue loop is connected between a "+24V" terminal and "AO 1" ( for the first analogue output) or "AO 2" (for the second analogue output), and so on for the other output signals. Externally powered loops to 27 VDC may be connected by connecting the output between the

"AO terminal (positive) and the "COM" terminal (negative). Zener protection of analogue outputs provides protection against short periods of over-voltage but longer periods may result in module damage. Note that the common is connected internally to ground and no other point in the analogue loop should be grounded. Analogue outputs may also be configured to individually turn off (0 mA) if no command message is received to that output for a certain period. See Chapter 4 Configuration for further details. 2.4.6 Pulse Input (-1) For the -1 module, digital input 1 may be configured as a pulse input (max rate 100 Hz, min. off time 5 ms). In this mode, both the pulse rate and the pulse count are available for mapping to a remote output. The pulse rate may appear at any analogue output on the remote unit, while the pulse count can appear at a Pulse Output on another -1 or Digital Output on a -3 unit. The pulse input should be connected in the same way as a digital input. 2.4.7 Pulse Inputs (-2) For the -2 module, the four digital inputs (DI 1-4) may be configured as pulse inputs. The first man_905_2.1.doc Page 17 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual digital/pulse input DI 1 has a maximum rate of 1000 Hz (min. off time 0.5 ms), while DI 2-4 have a maximum rate of 100 Hz (min. off time 5 ms). When using DI 1 at high pulse rates (more than 100 Hz), a divide by 10 function may be configured to reduce the pulse count at the output, as Pulse Outputs have a maximum rate of 100 Hz. For each pulse input, both the pulse rate and the pulse count are available for mapping to a remote output. The pulse rate may appear at any analogue output on the remote unit, while the pulse count can appear at a Pulse Output. The default update time for pulse counts is 1 minute. This can be changed by changing the update time configuration - refer Chapter 4 Configuration for further details. The pulse count is a 16 bit value - roll over of the count when it exceeds the maximum value is automatically handled by the modules. Pulse inputs should be wired in the same way as digital inputs (see Section 2.4.1). 2.4.8 Pulse Output (-1) A single FET output to common rated at 30VDC, 500 mA is provide for the pulse output "PO". This output accurately recreates the pulses counted at a pulse input at a -1 or -2 module. Although the count is accurately re-created, the rate of output pulses may not accurately reflect the input rate. The actual input pulse rate may be configured to appear at an analogue output if required. Note that the pulse rate and accumulated value will remain accurate even if a period of communications failure has occurred. The maximum output rate is 100 Hz. If a high speed pulse input is used (more than 100 Hz) on PI1 of a -2 module, the pulse input count should not be transmitted to a PO on the -1 or DO on the -3 without configuring the divide-by-10 function (on the

-2 module) 2.4.9 Pulse Output (-3) The first four digital outputs on the -3 module may also be used as pulse outputs. The outputs are FET output to common rated at 30VDC, 500 mA. The outputs will provide a pulse signal of up to 100 Hz. The outputs accurately recreate the pulses counted at pulse inputs at a -1 or -2 module. Although the count is accurately re-created, the rate of output pulses may not accurately reflect the input rate. The actual input pulse rate may be configured to appear at an analogue output if required. Note that the pulse rate and accumulated value will remain accurate even if a period of communications failure has occurred. 2.4.10 RS232 Serial Port The serial port is a 9 pin DB9 female and provides for connection to a terminal or to a PC for configuration, field testing and for factory testing. This port is internally shared with the RS485 -

Page 18 March 2000 Chapter Two Installation ensure that the RS485 is disconnected before attempting to use the RS232 port. Communication is via standard RS-232 signals. The is configured as DCE equipment with the pin-out detailed below. The serial port communicates at a baud rate of 9600 baud, 8 bits, no parity, one stop bit. Pin Name Dirn Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DCD RD TD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI Out Out In In

Out In Out

Data carrier detect - not used Transmit Data - Serial Data Input (High = 0, Low = 1) Receive Data - Serial Data Output (High = 0, Low = 1) Data Terminal Ready - not used Signal Ground Data Set Ready - not used Request to Send - not used Clear to send - not used Ring indicator - not used. An example cable drawing for connection to a laptop is detailed below:

MALE FEMALE 2.4.11 RS485 Serial Port The RS485 port provides for communication between multiple units using a multi-drop cable. Up to 32 units may be connected in each multi-drop network. Each multi-drop network may have one unit providing radio communications with other units in the system. The RS485 feature allows local hubs of control to operate without occupying radio bandwidth required for communication between remotely sited units. The RS485 Communications format is 9600 baud, 8 data bits, one stop bit, no parity. Note that the RS485 port is shared internally with the RS232 port - disconnect the RS232 cable after man_905_2.1.doc Page 19 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual configuration is complete. Page 20 March 2000 Chapter Two Installation RS485 is a balanced, differential standard but it is recommended that shielded, twisted pair cable be used to interconnect modules to reduce potential Radio Frequency Interference (RFI). An RS485 network should be wired as indicated in the diagram below and terminated at each end of the network with a 120 ohm resistor.

man_905_2.1.doc Page 21 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Chapter Three OPERATION 3.1 Power-up and Normal Operation When power is initially connected to the module, the module will perform internal diagnostics to check its functions. The following table details the status of the indicating LEDs on the front panel under normal operating conditions. LED Indicator OK RX RX RX TX

(only on U units) PWR Condition On Occasional flash Flashes continuously On Occasional flash On OK Flashes every 5 seconds Meaning Normal Operation Radio Receiving, or Activity on serial ports Configuration Mode Button press when entering Configuration Mode Radio Transmitting Supply voltage available from Solar Panel or SUP1/SUP2

+24V Supply overloaded Additional LEDs provide indication of the status of digital inputs and outputs. LEDs display the status of each digital input (lit for active), and LEDs display the status of each digital output (lit for active). Other conditions indicating a fault are described in Chapter Six Troubleshooting. The module monitors the power supply and provides status of supply failure and battery low voltage for "mapping" to one of the module's own outputs or transmitting to a remote output. When the module is powered from a normal supply (i.e. via either of the SUP terminals), the PWR LED indicator is lit. When the modules is powered from a solar panel and battery, the PWR LED indicator is lit only when the charge current is available (i.e. when the solar panel is receiving light). In the event of excessively low battery voltage (10.8V), the OK LED will go off, the unit will automatically set all outputs off, and disable the +24V analogue loop supply. the OK LED will turn on again after the battery voltage exceeds 11.3V. This enables installations to be configured so that the battery current drain is minimised in the event of extended mains failure, reducing the possibility of deep discharge of batteries. 3.1.1 Communications If transmissions are not successful, then the module will re-try up to four times at random intervals to transmit the message. If communications is still not successful, the Comms Fail internal status will be set. In the default configuration, this will have no consequence and the module will continue Page 22 March 2000 Chapter Three Operation to attempt to transmit to the remote module every ten minutes. For critical applications, this status can be configured to be reflected to an output on the module for alert purposes. The outputs on the module may also be configured to reset after a specified timeout (digital outputs reset to off, analogue outputs reset to 0 mA) allowing the system to turn off in a controlled manner e.g. a pump will never be left running because of a system failure. Example of Successful Communications Local Unit Listen to ensure channel is clear If clear, transmit message TX LED flashes if radio RX LED flashes if RS485 RX LED flashes Acknowledgement received okay -

communication complete Example of unsuccessful communications Local Unit Listen to ensure channel is clear If clear, transmit message TX LED flashes if radio RX LED flashes if RS485 No acknowledgement received Retry up to four times Still no acknowledgement

(4) Comms fail status to remote unit set If status is mapped to an output, set output Remote Unit Receive message RX LED flashes Check message for integrity If message okay, transmit it back as acknowledgement TX LED flashes if radio RX LED flashes if RS485 Outputs updated as per message received. Remote Unit Receive message RX LED flashes Check message for integrity Message corrupted nothing

- do If no update received for an output within watchdog timeout, check to see if the output is configured to reset Reset outputs if configured man_905_2.1.doc Page 23 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Repeaters can be used in a system to increase range. Each U unit can be configured to act as a repeater. When configuring an input to be mapped to an output, the communications path to the output unit, including the repeater addresses is specified. The U acts as a digital repeater, that is, the signal is decoded and then retransmitted as new. Example Repeater Communications Unit A DI 1 mapped to Unit D DO1 via Units B & C Unit A DI 1 is turned on Transmit Receive Acknowledge Unit B Repeater Unit C Repeater Unit D Receive Transmit on with Acknowledge Receive Acknowledge Receive Transmit on with Acknowledge Receive Acknowledge Receive Transmit acknowledge DO 1 is turned on 3.1.2 Change of state conditions The module transmits a data message whenever it detects a "change-of-state" on one of its input signals. A "change-of-state" of a digital or digital internal input is a change from "off" to "on" or vice-

versa provided the change is sustained for 0.5 second (i.e. 0.5 second debounce). In addition to "change-of-state" transmissions, each module will transmit the status of each input to its corresponding output every ten minutes (configurable). These updates mean that the outputs are set to the current input values regularly, even where no change-of-state has occurred. These update transmissions increase the accuracy of the output and give extra system reliability. Analogue Change-of-state A "change-of-state" for an analogue input, battery voltage or pulse input rate is a change in value of the signal of 3% (configurable) since the last transmission. Note that the sensitivity of 3% refers to 3% of the analogue range, not 3% of the instantaneous analogue value. That is, if an analogue input changes from 64% (14.24 mA) to 67% (14.72 mA), a "change-of-state" will be detected. This change-of-state sensitivity is configurable between 0.8% and 50%. Analogue inputs are digitally filtered to prevent multiple transmissions on continually varying or

"noisy" signals. The input is filtered with a 1 second time constant and a 1 second debounce. The analogue outputs are filtered with a 1 second time constant. An example explaining the interaction of these figures is shown below. In general, the following may be used as a rule of thumb for Page 24 March 2000 Chapter Three Operation calculating the appropriate sensitivity required for a given application:

Instantaneous change of 2 x sensitivity on input Instantaneous change of 10 x sensitivity on input The analogue inputs have 15 bit resolution and 0.016mA accuracy. An example of an analogue input and how the output follows it is shown below:

3 second output response 5 second output response Pulse input change of state Pulse input counts do not use change-of-state transmissions. Instead, accumulated pulse input counts are transmitted at set intervals. The default period is 1 minute and is configurable. Note that the pulse outputs are re-created from the accumulated pulse count. If a transmission is missed, the pulse output will still be re-created when the next accumulated value is transmitted. This ensures that no pulses are lost due to communications failures. The following diagram shows how pulse inputs are re-created as pulse outputs. For pulse outputs, the module keeps two counters in memory - the pulse input count received from the remote module, and the count of output pulses. When the receives an update of the input pulse count, it will output pulses until the output pulse count is the same as the input pulse count. The output pulse man_905_2.1.doc Page 25 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual will be output evenly over the pulse output update time which is configured in the module. For example, assume that module receives a pulse input update message from the remote module, and the difference between the pulse input count and the pulse output count is 12 pulses. The will then output the 12 pulses evenly over the next minute (if the pulse output update time is 1 minute). The default values for the pulse input update time and pulse output update time is 1 minute. In this case, the output pulses are effectively 1 minute behind the input pulses. These update times may be changed by the user. The pulse output update time should not be set to be more than the pulse input update time. Note that the maximum pulse rate for both inputs and outputs is 100Hz. PI update time Input Pulses Output Pulses Time Time PO update time As well as accumulating the pulse input, the module will also calculate the rate of pulses. Pulse rates are treated as an internal analogue input and are configured with analogue sensitivities for change-of-state transmissions. The maximum pulse rate corresponding to 20mA output may be configured by the user. 3.1.3 Analogue Set-points On -1 modules, the AI 1 input may be used to trigger the analogue set-point status. High set point and low set point levels are configurable. This set-point status turns ON when the analogue input moves below the low level, and turns OFF when it moves above the high level. The high level must always be greater than, or equal to, the low level set point. This set-point status may be mapped (inverted, if required) to any output in the network. The set-point status is effectively an internal digital input. On -2 modules, each analogue input has set-point values for controlling digital outputs. The set-

point operation works as for the -1 module. Page 26 March 2000 Chapter Three 3.1.4 Start-up Poll Operation After a module has completed its initial diagnostics following power up, it will transmit update messages to remote modules based on the values of the modules inputs. The modules outputs will remain in the reset/off/zero condition until it receives update or change-of-state messages from the remote modules. The module can transmit a special start-up poll message to another module. The remote module will then immediately send update messages to this module such that its outputs can be set to the correct value. Start-up polls will only occur if they are configured. It is necessary to configure a start-up poll to each remote module which controls the modules outputs. For further information, refer to Chapter 4 Configuration. 3.1.5 Communications Failure (CF) The internal communications failure (CF) status is set if a module does not receive an acknowledgement message after five attempts at transmitting a message. The CF status may be configured to set a local digital output for an external alarm. Although the CF status can set an output, it will not reset the output. That is, once communications is re-established (and the CF status is reset), the output will stay on. The Reset Output feature

(see below) is used to reset the output. The output will reset only when no communications failures occur within the configured Reset Output Time for the output that CF status is mapped to. Note that if the reset output time is not enabled, the CF status will remain set forever, once an unsuccessful transmission occurs. See Chapter 4 Configuration for further details. 3.1.6 Resetting Outputs Each digital and analogue output may be individually configured to reset if that output has not received a change-of-state or an update message within a certain time period. Generally this time is set to twice the update period, so at least one update can be missed before an output is reset. In most cases it is desirable to reset outputs which are controlling equipment if there is a system failure, however alarm or indication outputs are not reset so the last valid indication remains shown. See Chapter 4 Configuration for further details. 3.2 System Design Tips The following tips will help to ensure that your system operates reliably. 3.2.1 System Dynamics It is important to be aware of the dynamics of the system. Digital inputs have a minimum debounce delay of 0.5 sec - that is, a change message will not be sent for 0.5 sec after a change has occurred. Analogue inputs and outputs have time delays of 1 to 2 seconds. man_905_2.1.doc Page 27 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Messages transmitted via serial link are received in less than 20 mSec, however a message sent by radio takes approx 100 mSec. These delays are not significant is most applications, however if your application requires faster responses, then the above delays need to be considered. 3.2.2 Radio Channel Capacity Messages sent on a cable link are much faster than on a radio channel, and the capacity of the radio channel must be considered when designing a system. This becomes more important as the I/O size of a system increases. The modules are designed to provide real-time operation. When an input signal changes, a change message is sent to change the output. The system does not require continuous messages to provide fast operation (as in a polling system). Update messages are intended to check the integrity of the system, not to provide fast operation. Update times should be selected based on this principle. The default update time is 10 minutes - we recommend that you leave these times as 10 minutes unless particular inputs are very important and deserve a smaller update time. It is important that radio paths be reliable. For large systems, we recommend a maximum radio channel density of 100 messages per minute, including change messages and update messages. We suggest that you do not design for an average transmission rate of greater than 50 per minute - this will give a peak rate of approx 100 per minute. Note that this peak rate assumes that all radio paths are reliable - poor radio paths will require re-try transmissions and will reduce the peak channel density. If there are other users on the radio channel, then this peak figure will also decrease. The modules will only transmit one message at a time. If re-tries are necessary, another message cannot start. The time between re-tries is a random time between 1 and 5 seconds. The time for five tries is between 5 and 21 seconds. Another message cannot be sent until the last one has finished. This delay will obviously have an affect on a busy system. 3.2.3 Radio Path Reliability Radio paths over short distances can operate reliably with a large amount of obstruction in the path. As the path distance increases, the amount of obstruction which can be tolerated decreases. At the maximum reliable distance, line-of-sight is required for reliable operation. If the path is over several kilometres (or miles), then the curvature of the earth is also an obstacle and must be allowed for. For example, the earth curvature over 10 km is approx 3m, requiring aerials to be elevated at least 4m to achieve line-of-sight even if the path is flat. A radio path may act reliably in good weather, but poorly in bad weather - this is called a marginal radio path. If the radio path is more than 20% of the maximum reliable distance (see Specification section for these distances), we recommend that you test the radio path before installation. Each U module has a radio path testing feature - refer to section 6.2 of this manual. Page 28 March 2000 Chapter Three Operation There are several ways of improving a marginal path :-

Relocate the unit to a better position. If there is an obvious obstruction causing the problem, then locating the unit to the side or higher will improve the path. If it is not practical to improve a marginal path, then the last method is to use another module as a repeater. A repeater does not have to be between the two modules (although often it is). If possible, use an existing module in the system which has good radio path to both modules. The repeater module can be to the side of the two modules, or even behind one of the modules, if the repeater module is installed at a high location (for example, a tower or mast). Repeater modules can have their own I/O and act as a normal U module in the system. 3.2.4 Design for Failures All well designed systems consider system failure. I/O systems operating on a wire link will fail eventually, and a radio system is the same. Failures could be short-term (interference on the radio channel or power supply failure) or long-term (equipment failure). The modules provide the following features for system failure :-

Outputs can reset if they do not receive a message within a configured time. If an output should receive an update or change message every 10 minutes, and it has not received a message within this time, then some form of failure is likely. If the output is controlling some machinery, then it is good design to switch off this equipment until communications has been re-established. The modules provide a drop outputs on comms fail time. This is a configurable time value for each output. If a message has not been received for this output within this time, then the output will reset (off, in-active, 0). We suggest that this reset time be a little more than twice the update time of the input. It is possible to miss one update message because of short-term radio interference, however if two successive update messages are missed, then long term failure is likely and the output should be reset. For example, if the input update time is 3 minutes, set the output reset time to 7 minutes. A module can provide an output which activates on communication failure to another module. This can be used to provide an external alarm that there is a system fault. man_905_2.1.doc Page 29 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Chapter Four CONFIGURATION 4.1 Introduction The modules may be configured by connecting a computer (PC) using the Configuration Software programme. Alternatively, the module may be configured by the on-board miniature switches located under the blue cover on the front of the module. This chapter describes the default configuration of the module and using the Configuration Software Programme. For details on switch configuration, please refer to the separate Switch Configuration Manual, available from distributors. Each module is configured with a system address and a unit address. The system address is common to every module in the same system, and is used to prevent "cross-talk" between modules in different systems. Separate networks with different system addresses may operate independently in the same area without affecting each other. The system address may be any number between 1 and 32 767. The actual value of the system address is not important, provided all modules in the same system have the same system address value. A system address of zero should not be used. Each unit must have a unique unit address within the one system. A valid unit address is 1 to 127. A network may have up to 95 individual modules communicating via radio (unit addresses 1 to 95), each with up to 31 modules communicating via RS485 (unit addresses 96 to 127). In the network, any individual input signal may be "mapped" to one or more outputs anywhere in the system. The unit address determines the method of communication to a module. Any module with a unit address between 96 and 127 will communicate by RS485 only. Other units with a unit address below 95 may communicate by radio or RS485 - the unit will determine which way to communicate depending upon the unit address of the destination module. For example, Unit 31 will talk to Unit 97 by RS485 only, but will talk to unit 59 by radio only. 105S units must always have a unit address between 96 and 127 as serial communication is the only method of communication available. A unit address of zero should not be used. The three different products in the range can be used together in the same system. Inputs to one product type can be transmitted to outputs of another product type. For example, an analogue input to a -2 may be transmitted to an analogue output of a -1 or -3. Repeaters may be any product type. The -1 and -2 modules require only one unit address. The -3 module uses two addresses, however only one unit address has to be entered. The -3 module requires two addresses because of the large number of output channels. If the entered" unit address is an even number, then the second address is the next number. If the "entered" address is an odd number, then the second address is the previous number. So the two addresses are two subsequent numbers, starting with an even number. If a -3 module is given a unit address of 10, then it will also take up the unit address 11 and will accept messages addressed to either 10 or 11. It is important to remember this when allocating unit addresses to other modules in the system. Warning - do not allocate the address number 1 to a -3 module. Page 30 March 2000 Chapter Four Configuration In addition to these network configurations, operational parameters called User Options may be configured to change the features of the operation. These parameters may be configured using the Configuration Software of configuration switches (see Switch Configuration Manual) 4.2 Easy Configuration Using Default Settings If your application requires only a single pair of modules, communicating via radio or serial link, default settings may satisfy your needs. If so, no configuration is required. Essentially, all inputs at Module A are reflected at the corresponding outputs at Module B. All inputs at Module B are reflected at the corresponding outputs at Module A. For -1 modules, the default configuration is as follows :-

In this configuration, the PO Pulse output is inactive and no special action is taken on Comms fail, Mains fail or Battery Low. DI 1 is configured as a digital and not a pulse input. man_905_2.1.doc Page 31 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual For -2 and -3 modules, the default configuration is as follows :-

The following table details the default values for User Options:

Option Update transmissions Analogue Change-of-state sensitivity Reset outputs on Comms fail Analogue Setpoints (if mapped) Pulse Output Rate Scaling

(if Pulse Rate is mapped) Digital Input Debounce Time Factory Set Value Every 10 minutes 3%

No Low Set point = 30%

High Set point = 75%

100 Hz 0.5 seconds If any of the above values are not appropriate to your system, Section 4.4 below will detail how to change one or all of the above variables. Page 32 March 2000 Chapter Four 4.3 Configuration Configuration Software This chapter describes installation and operation of configuration software for the radio and serial telemetry modules. Configuration software eliminates the need for configuration of the unit via the 16 DIL switches under the blue plastic plug.. This software provides all of the functions available through the switch configuration as well as additional configuration options not available through switch configuration. The configuration software runs on a conventional PC as a DOS programme. The software creates a configuration file that can be loaded into a module via RS232. The configuration software also allows the configuration of a module to be downloaded for display and modification. Configuration files can be saved to disk for later retrieval. Configuration of modules consists of entering I/O mappings, and selecting User Options. An I/O mapping is a link between an input on the module being configured and an output on another module. A mapping has the form :-

DI3 Out2 at 4 via 3, 11 This mapping links DI3 on this module to output channel 2 on the module with address 4, and modules 3 and 11 are repeaters. Up to 32 mappings may be entered for each module. User Options may be selected to change the configuration of specific features. IBM or compatible PC (386 or higher) with MS-DOS, MS-Windows 3.1, Windows-95/98 4.3.1 Hardware Requirements 3.5" 1.44M floppy drive (for software installation) At least one serial port (preferably two serial ports to allow mouse operation). RS-232 serial cable as shown below. End DB9 Male DB9 female PC End 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Required Optional man_905_2.1.doc Page 33 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual 4.3.2 Installation Running from floppy disk The software may be run directly from the distribution disk. If the software is to be used in this manner, a copy of the distribution disk should be made, and the copy used to run the software. Installing to a hard disk Most users will want to install the configuration software to the hard disk of their computer. This may be simply achieved by creating a directory on the destination hard disk and copying the contents of the distribution disk to the hard disk. For example, if the destination hard disk is drive C: and the distribution floppy is in drive A: the following sequence of instructions may be used. C:> MKDIR CFG105 C:> COPY A:\*.EXE CFG105 Hints for Windows Users For slower machines, the software should be run in Full Screen and Exclusive mode under Windows. If problems are experienced, exit windows and run the program from DOS. 4.3.3 Software Operation Running from MS-DOS Start the software by entering the directory where the configuration program is stored, and entering the executable file name. For example, if the executable is stored in C:\CFG105 type the following C:\> CD CFG105 C:\CFG105> CFG105-1 To configure a -1 module C:\CFG105> CFG105-2 To configure a -2 module C:\CFG105> CFG105-3 To configure a -3 module and press the <ENTER> key. Running from MS-Windows Select the Run... option from the Start menu. In the Command Line Box type:

C:\CFG105\CFG105-1 To configure a -1 module, C:\CFG105\CFG105-2 To configure a -2 module, C:\CFG105\CFG105-3 To configure a -3 module, and press the <ENTER> key. The Initial screen will appear as below. Page 34 March 2000 Chapter Four Configuration This screen shows the system address, unit address, a summary of all of the mappings configured, and the current file (if any) being used. To move between editing the system address, unit address, and configuration mappings, use the <TAB> key, or use the <ALT> key in conjunction with the highlighted letter. Alternatively, simply click on the appropriate section with the mouse. Changing the system address and unit address To change the system address and unit address, simply move to the appropriate box using the

<TAB> key or the <ALT> + letter keys, or mouse click, and type in a new number or use the arrow keys to edit the old number. Entering a new mapping To enter a new mapping, move to the Mappings section of the screen using the <TAB>, <ALT> +

M keys or the mouse. Hit the <INS> key or double click the left mouse button to bring up a dialogue box as shown below. Select the desired mapping type and hit the <ENTER> key or select OK to continue. Input/Output Standard mapping of an input to an output at another unit. Poll Start-up poll of a remote unit to ensure data is up to date Comms Fail Set a local output on comms fail to a remote site man_905_2.1.doc Page 35 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Changing an existing mapping Select the mapping to change using the mouse or arrow keys, and either press the <ENTER> key, or click the right mouse button. Deleting an existing mapping Select the mapping to delete using the mouse or arrow keys, and press the <DEL> key to delete the mapping. A message asks for confirmation to ensure mappings are not deleted accidentally. Configuring Input/Output mapping types On selecting an Input/Output type mapping, a dialogue box allows entry of the desired mapping. Depending on the type of unit being configured (-1, -2, or -3), the dialogue box will vary. The following is the display for configuration of Input/Output mappings on a -1 module. The -2 module has 32 different inputs, and the 10GenericName-3 module has only 4 inputs. Item Input Output Meaning The input to be mapped. The output (usually at a remote site) at which the signal is to appear. Destination Address The address of the site where the output is to appear. Store And Forward The addresses of any intermediate repeater units needed to reach the destination address (entered in order of nearest to furthermost repeater). Invert Optional inversion of the signal (-1 and -3 only). Page 36 March 2000 Chapter Four Configuration Select the desired mapping configuration, then press <ENTER> or select the OK button on the dialogue box to return to the main screen. Outputs are identified by the corresponding output name for each type of destination module. These correspond to the outputs of the various modules as follows:

-1 Output

-2 Output

-3 First address

(Even)

-3 Second address

(Odd) Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 DOT 1 DOT 2 DOT 3 DOT 4 AOT 1 AOT 2 PULSE OUT None Configuring Start-Up Polls DOT 1 None None None None None None None DOT/PULSE 1 DOT/PULSE 2 DOT/PULSE 3 DOT/PULSE 4 DOT 5 DOT 6 DOT 7 DOT 8 AOT 1 AOT 2 AOT 3 AOT 4 AOT 5 AOT 6 AOT 7 AOT 8 When a unit is first turned on, its outputs will not be set until it receives update messages from any other units in the system which have inputs configured to appear at those outputs. To ensure that outputs are set as soon as possible after start-up the unit may be configured to Poll any other units with mappings to its outputs. This is achieved by selecting Poll from the Mapping Type dialogue box. If Poll is selected from the mapping type dialogue box, then the following dialogue box is displayed. Enter the address of the unit to poll in the Destination address section, and the addresses of any intermediate units required to reach this unit in the Store and Forward section (starting with the nearest repeater address). Configuring Comms Fail Mappings In situations where an indication of unsuccessful communication (comms) to a remote module is required, an output at the local module may be turned on in the event of unsuccessful comms. man_905_2.1.doc Page 37 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Successful comms does not turn off the output, so the Drop outputs on comms fail (Refer below) time should be set to a period similar to the update time for the remote. This allows comms fail indication to multiple remotes to be configured to appear at the same output, which acts as a general comms fail indication. Configuring a Comms Fail Address of zero causes communication failure to any destination module to be indicated on the selected output. For example, if Comms fail to unit 12 is configured to DO1, then the module will set (or activate) DO1 each time communications to unit 12 is not successful. If DO1 has a Drop outputs on comms fail time configured of 10 minutes, then DO1 will reset (de-activate) 10 minutes after the last comms fail to unit 12. Enter the output at which the comms fail indication is to appear, and the address for which the comms fail should be indicated. Saving and Loading Configurations to / from Disk It is strongly recommended that the configuration for each unit in the system is saved to a backup file. In the unlikely event of unit failure, a replacement unit may be quickly configured from the saved file. When editing a configuration is complete, it may be saved to a disk file for future use, or for further editing. The File menu on the top menu bar provides access to saving and restoring configuration files. Files are stored with the default extension . for -1 configurations, extension .205 for -2 configurations and .305 for -3 configurations. Standard file dialogue boxes for Load, Save, and Save As commands provide simple file management. When a file is loaded or saved the status line at the bottom of the screen Current File changes to indicate the name of the current file. 4.3.4 Changing User Options User options allow a variety of parameters of the module to be modified to suit a particular application. User Options are available through the User Options menu on the top menu bar. User options are Update Times Page 38 March 2000 Chapter Four Configuration Analogue Sensitivity Reset Output on Comms Fail Digital/Analogue Debounce (-1 and -2 only) Analogue Debounce (-2 only) Set-points (-1 and -2 only) Pulse Rate Scale (-1 and -2 only) Pulse Output Update (-1 and -3 only) Update Times allows configuration of how frequently each configured mapping is updated

(Integrity Update). The period of update (check) transmissions may be configured individually for each input. The default period is 10 minutes for all inputs, except for pulse inputs (1 minute). Note that this is the check transmission time - updates will also be sent on any change-of-state on each input. It is important here to keep in mind the principle - Less radio traffic means better communications. Short update times should only be used in special circumstances, or when an RS-485 network is used, and the message is not transmitted over a radio link. Frequent updates from multiple units causes congestion of the radio channel, which results in increased communication failures and general performance degradation of the system. Analogue Sensitivity allows configuration of the change required in an analogue input before a Change Of State is detected, and the new analogue value is transmitted. For input signals which vary widely over a short period of time or have a normal oscillation, the analogue sensitivity should be set to an appropriately large value. This ensures that many change messages are not transmitted in too short a time. This will result in channel congestion, as described in the preceding section. Reset Output on Comms Fail allows the Comms Fail Time to be selected - this is the time for an output to reset if it has not received an update or change message. Each output on the unit, either analogue or digital, may be configured to reset (off or 0mA) when no update transmission has been received for a certain time. The default condition is zero (no reset). This option can be used to ensure that communications failure will not result in loss of control. For example, outputs connected to pumps should be configured to reset on communications failure so that the pump will turn off. If the reset time is less than the update time, then the output will reset when the reset time expires, and then set again when the update message is received. We recommend that the reset time be a little more than twice the update time. Debounce is the time which an input must stay stable before the module decides that a change of state has occurred. If the input changes (say 0 0) in less than the debounce time, then the module will ignore both changes. Debounce may be configured for digital inputs on the -1 and -2 modules (0.5 - 8 seconds) and the analogue inputs on the -2 module (0.5 -

8 seconds). The default value of 0.5 seconds is suitable for most applications. In applications where a digital input may turn on and off several times slowly (for example, security switches or float 1) and changes again (1 man_905_2.1.doc Page 39 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual switches) a debounce time of up to 8 seconds may be configured. The configured debounce time has no affect on pulse inputs. Note that the analogue debounce is not configurable for the -1, but is configurable in the -2. Set-points allow a remote digital output to be turned on and off depending on the value of an analogue input. The set-point status internal input must be mapped to an output for this option to have effect. When the AI is less than the Low Set-point (LSP), the set-point status will be active

(on, 1) - when the AI is more than the High Set Point (HSP), the set-point status will be reset

(off, 0). Note that the High Set Point (HSP) must always be higher than the Low Set Point

(LSP). For the -1 module, only AI1 has set-point values. For -2 modules, all six analogue inputs have set-points. Debounce time operates on the set-point status in the same way as digital inputs. Pulse Rate Scale is used when pulse rate is mapped to an analogue output. The pulse rate scale configures the maximum expected pulse input frequency. This is the frequency for which the pulse rate input indicates the maximum value (20 mA if mapped to an analogue output). On the -1, the maximum value is 100 Hz. On the 105-2, the maximum value is 1000 Hz for input 1, and 100 Hz for inputs 2-4. Pulse input 1 on the -2 module can measure pulse signals up to 1000 Hz, however all pulse outputs have a maximum rate of only 100 Hz. For pulse inputs greater than 100 Hz, a Divide-by-10 function should be configured. The input count is then divided by 10 before transmitting. The default is 100Hz (no divide-by-10). Where the 1000Hz option is configured, then each output pulse means 10 pulses (or 10 counts). Pulse Output Update is the time which pulses are output after a PI update is received. It should be configured to correspond to the pulse input update time for the corresponding pulse input. This ensures that the pulse output rate matches as closely as possible the pulse input rate which it is reflecting. For example, if the PI update time is 1 minute, then the PO update time should also be 1 minute. If the PI update time is changed, then the PO update time at the remote module should be also changed. The PO will still operate if the time is not changed, however pulses may be output faster or slower than the input pulses. 4.3.5 Programming / Downloading Configuration Transferring configuration to the Module Once editing of the configuration is complete, the configuration must be loaded into the before the new configuration takes effect. Before proceeding, close any other programmes on the PC that is using the communications port. Connect the cable from the PCs serial port to the serial port. From the Communication menu, select Select Comms Port Select the appropriate serial port from the list provided (COM1 - COM4) Page 40 March 2000 Chapter Four Configuration From the Communication menu, select Program The 105 The configuration program will now attempt to download the configuration data to the module. If all goes well, a Programming prompt will appear. This prompt will remain until programming of the is complete. If the is not correctly connected, or is not turned on, it may take up to a minute for the configuration program to stop trying to connect to the . Loading existing Configuration from the To download the configuration from a for editing or simply for checking, follow the following steps:

Connect the cable from the PCs serial port to the serial port. From the Communication menu, select Select Comms Port Select the appropriate serial port from the list provided (COM1 - COM4) From the Communication menu, select Load Config from 105 The configuration program will now attempt to upload the configuration data from the . If all goes well, a Loading prompt will appear. This prompt will remain until loading of data from the is complete. If the is not correctly connected, or is not turned on, it may take up to a minute for the configuration program to stop trying to connect to the . man_905_2.1.doc Page 41 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Chapter Five SPECIFICATIONS General Radio standards 905U Housing Terminal blocks LED indication Operating Temperature Power Supply Battery supply AC supply DC supply FCC Part 15.247 130 x 185 x 60mm DIN rail mount Removable 902 928 MHz, 1W Powder-coated, extruded aluminium Suitable for 2.5 mm2 conductors Power supply, OK operation, digital I/O, RX and TX

-20 to 60 degrees C 11.3 - 15.0 VDC 12 - 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz Overvoltage protected 15 - 30 VDC Overvoltage and protected reverse voltage Mains supply 110-250 VAC via plug-pack transformer Battery Charging circuit Solar regulator Included Included Current Drain 70 mA quiescent for U 45 mA quiescent for S for 1.2-12 ahr sealed lead acid battery Direct connection of solar panel (up to 30W) and solar battery (100 Ahr)

+ 10 mA/active digital input

+ 25 mA/active digital output

+ 2 x analogue I/O loop (mA) 24V DC 150 mA Can be transmitted to remote modules As above Included Monitored Monitored Analogue loop supply Mains fail status Battery voltage Radio Transceiver (905U) Type Frequency Transmit power Spread Spectrum 902 - 928 Mhz Fixed Frequency Hopping 250 kHz channel spacing 1 W Signal detect / RSSI

-120 to -80 dBm Aerial Connector Serial Ports RS232 Port Reverse SMA Coaxial DB9 female DCE RS485 Port 2 pin terminal block 9600 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit 9600 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, Page 42 March 2000 Chapter Five Specifications Data transmission Protocol - serial

- radio Communications fail status Inputs and Outputs Digital Inputs Digital Outputs Digital Outputs Pulse Inputs On change-of-state

+ integrity update asynchronous ARQ, with 16 bit CRC synchronous ARQ Typical distance 1km Update time configurable Automatic acknowledgments with up to 4 retries May be mapped to local or remote output Resetting of outputs on comms fail configurable

-1 Four 105-2 Four 105-3 None 105-1 Four 105-2 One 105-3 Eight 105-1 One 105-2 Four 105-3 None Opto-isolated (5000V)inputs, suitable for voltage free contacts or NPN transistor, contact wetting current 5mA, input debounce 0.5 second Relay output contacts, normally open, AC1 5A 250V AC3 2A 250V, 5A 120V DC1 5A 30V, 5A 20V DC3 2A 30V, 5A 20V FET output, 30 VDC 500mA max. Uses DI1. Max rate 100Hz, min. off-

time 5msec. Uses DI1-4. Max rate of DI1 is 1000Hz, min. off-time 0.5msec Max rate of DI2-4 is 100Hz, min. off-time 5msec. Pulse Output 105-1 One 105-2 None 105-3 Four FET output, 30 VDC 500mA max Max rate for 105-1 is100 Hz. Max rate for 105-3 is 1000 Hz. Pulse signal recreated, pulse avail. on analogue

(scaling configurable). Divide-by-10 available for 1000Hz inputs. output, rate Analogue Inputs 105-1 Two 4-20 mA 105-2 Six 0-20mA floating differential input, common mode voltage -0.5V to 27V. 24 VDC for powering external loops provided, 150 mA max. Resolution 15 bit, man_905_2.1.doc Page 43 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Analogue Input Setpoints 105-3 None 105-1 AI 1 only 105-2 AI 1-6 Analogue Outputs 105-1 Two 4-20mA 105-2 None 105-3 Eight 0-20mA Accuracy 10 bit, Digital filter time constant 1 second (config.) Configurable high & low set-points, allowing set/reset of remote digital outputs current sink to common, max loop voltage 27V, Resolution 15 bit Accuracy 10 bit (0.016mA) System Parameters Network Configurations Mapping User Configuration Diagnostics Communications via radio or RS485 or network of both Up to 95 radio units with up to 32 serial units off each radio unit Any input to any output in system Via on-board DIP switches or RS232 terminal or laptop On board diagnostics Automatic check on start-up Input status Via RS232 terminal or laptop Output test Incoming radio signal level Simple radio path testing Page 44 March 2000 Chapter Six Troubleshooting Chapter Six TROUBLESHOOTING 6.1 INDICATOR OK LED OFF OK LED ON PWR LED ON TX LED ON RX LED ON RX LED ON RX LED ON No transmission on change of state Diagnostics Chart CONDITION Continuously Continuously Continuously Flashes briefly Flashes briefly Flashes continuously Continuously MEANING Battery Voltage low CPU failure

+24V supply failure/overload Normal Operation Supply available from SUP1/SUP2 Supply available from solar panel Radio transmitting Radio Receiving Serial port communicating Module in Configuration Mode Test Button press in Configuration Mode Unit not configured correctly - re-

configure and check operation The green OK LED on the front panel indicates correct operation of the unit. This LED extinguishes on failure as described above. When the OK LED extinguishes shutdown state is indicated. In this state, all digital outputs turn OFF and the +24V supply turns off. On processor failure, or on failure during start-up diagnostics, the unit shuts down, and remains in shutdown until the fault is rectified. The unit also shuts down if the battery voltage falls below 10.8 volts. This is a protection feature designed to protect the battery from deep discharge in case of extended period without supply voltage. 6.2 Self Test Functions 6.2.1 Input to Output Reflection (105-1 only) The unit will require re-configuration after SELF TEST. Ensure you know the required operational configuration including system and unit addresses so that the network can be restored after testing. Remove the cover in the front panel, and set the DIP switches as shown below. Hold down the red button for five seconds, or until the Rx LED glows yellow, release the Red button (the Rx LED now flashes), then press and release the Red button (the flashing Rx LED extinguishes). man_905_2.1.doc Page 45 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Input signals may now be connected to the input terminals of the module. If the module is operating correctly, then the input signals will be reflected to the corresponding output on the same module. For example, if DI 1 is connected to common - i.e. the first digital input is turned "ON" - then DO 1 will activate, if the module is functional. Similarly, if a 12mA signal is connected to AI 2, then a 12mA signal should be able to be measured from AO 2, if the module is functioning correctly. If a module does not pass its self test function, then it should be returned to an authorised service agent for attention 6.2.2 Radio Testing using Tone Reversals This function allows the unit to be configured to continuously transmit a sequence of alternate zeros and ones on the radio. This function provides the facility to check VSWR of aerials during installation, as well as checking the fade margin of the path between two units (see below - received signal strength indication). The tone reversals function is initiated by setting all of the DIL switches to ON, and holding down the red button for approximately 5 seconds( until the RX LED lights continuously). On releasing the button, the RX LED will flash continuously, and the TX LED will light, indicating that the radio transmitter is on. 6.2.3 Diagnostics menu To aid in the checking and set-up of the 105 unit, a user friendly menu provides access to diagnostic functions in the 105. Use of the diagnostics menu does not affect module configuration. To access these diagnostics, a terminal must be connected to the serial port on the unit. The terminal may be a standalone terminal, or a personal computer running terminal emulation software. The terminal or terminal emulation software must be set-up for 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity. The menu is accessed by connecting a terminal to the serial (DB9 RS-232) port on the 105 (ensure the RS485 port is disconnected), setting all switches to 0, and holding down the red button for approximately 5 seconds, until the RX LED lights continuously. One of the following menus will be displayed on the terminal :

Page 46 March 2000 Chapter Six 105 V1.0 a) Ins Tones Comms DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 AO1 AO2 Switch Signal b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k)

1052 V1.0 Digital Inputs Analogue Inputs Tones Comms DO1 Switch Signal a) b) c) d) e) f) g)

Troubleshooting 1053 V1.0 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) l) m) n) o) p) q) r) s) t) u)

Ins Tones Comms DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 DO8 AO1 AO2 AO3 AO4 AO5 AO6 AO7 AO8 Switch Signal Choose an item from the menu by entering the letter before that item. For example, to select the

"Comms" function from the 105-2 Menu, enter :- d Inputs This option provides a dynamic display of the status of all of the inputs in the 105, both internal and external. 105-1 Modules 1234MLS 0101001 P CNT 00F6 AI1 C000 AI2 4000 P RATE VBATT 8000 9C00 The first 7 values (1234MLS) each represent a single digital input. A 1 indicates that that input is ON, and a 0 indicates that the corresponding input is OFF. "1234" represents the four physical digital inputs, DI1 to DI4. "M" is the mains fail status (1 for mains fail, 0 for mains OK). "L" is the battery low volts status (1 for low volts 0 for OK). "S" is the set-point status. P CNT, AI1, AI2, P RATE, and VBATT each represent 16 bit values, displayed as four hexadecimal digits. P CNT is the current value of the pulsed input counter. This value should increment each time DI 1 turns from OFF to ON. P RATE displays the current pulse rate at DI1. This value is scaled according to the MAXRATE value configured (0 Hertz is displayed as 4000, and the maximum rate is displayed as C000). man_905_2.1.doc Page 47 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual AI1 and AI2 represent the value for the two analogue inputs. Full scale input (20 mA) is displayed as C000, 4mA is displayed as 4000, and 0ma is displayed as 2000. Analogue inputs are filtered digitally with a time constant of 1 second, so a sudden change in the analogue input current will result in a slower change in displayed analogue value, finally settling at the new value. A guide to translate the displayed value to the analogue input current is provided below. Add together the figures corresponding to each digit in each position to determine e.g. displayed value 3456 = 2.000+0.500+0.039+0.003 the current (mA)

= 2.542mA Digit Leftmost position Next position Next position Rightmost 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

0.000 2.000 4.000 6.000 8.000 10.000 12.000 14.000 16.000 18.000 20 22

0.000 0.125 0.250 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 0.875 1.000 1.125 1.250 1.375 1.500 1.625 1.750 1.875 0.000 0.008 0.016 0.023 0.031 0.039 0.047 0.055 0.063 0.070 0.078 0.086 0.094 0.102 0.109 0.117 position 0.000 0.000 0.001 0.001 0.002 0.002 0.003 0.003 0.004 0.004 0.005 0.005 0.006 0.006 0.007 0.007 VBATT is the current internally derived battery voltage. 4000 corresponds to 8 Volts, C000 represents 16 volts. A quicker method is use the calculation :

Battery voltage (volts) = I + 6, where I is the mA value determined from the above table using VBATT. For example, a value of VBATT of A000 gives an I value of 16mA from the above table. The battery voltage corresponding to this is 14V (or x 16 + 6). 105-2 Modules Digital Inputs DIN SETPNT PULSED 1234MSL123456 0000100111111 PIN1 0000 PIN2 0000 PIN3 0000 PIN4 0000 Page 48 March 2000 Chapter Six Troubleshooting AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6 0D3A 0CD2 0CC7 0CC7 0CD4 0CC7 Analogue Inputs VBAT PR1 PR2 PR3 8138 4000 105-3 Modules 4000 4000 PR4 4000 ML VBAT VSLR 00 9FA2 0000 Tones This provides the same function as described above in 6.2.2. Tone Reversals. This function may be used in conjunction with the Signal option (described below) to check the path between two 105 units. Comms This function allows monitoring of all messages transmitted and received over the radio. Transmitted messages are displayed starting in the leftmost column of the display. Received messages are displayed indented by one space. Received messages which have been corrupted are displayed with a '*' in the first column of the display. The first four hexadecimal digits are the system address attached to the message, and must match for units to communicate successfully. Example (105-1):

>c Comms 01FA8106008005C672D4F1

*01FA8186C6B5A7 01FA8106008005C672D4F1 01FA818600B5A7

*01FB86010080010000FEC2 01FA86010080010000FEC2 01FA868100332F DO1 to DO8 Command message transmitted by this unit. Corrupt Acknowledge received from remote. Message re-transmitted by this unit. (no Ack) Valid Acknowledge received from remote. Corrupt message received from remote unit. Re-sent message received from remote unit. Acknowledge message from this unit to remote. These options allow the user to set and clear digital outputs. To set an output, select the corresponding menu item, at the prompt, type the value FFFF to turn the output ON, or 0000 to turn the output OFF. For example, to set DO1 ON,

>e DO1

>FFFF man_905_2.1.doc Page 49 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual AO1 to AO8 These options allow the user to set analogue outputs to any value. To set the output, select the corresponding menu item. At the prompt type the value required for the analogue output as a four digit hexadecimal value. Refer to the table above for analogue current/expected value relationship. To set AO2 on 105-3 to 19 mA :

>m AO2

>B800 Switch This option allows testing of the DIL (Dual In Line) switches used for the configuration of the module. The diagram below indicates the layout of the switches of which there are two sets of eight, with an Enter button located to the right of the pair. the display indicates the current switch settings with the digit 1 corresponding to On and the digit O corresponding to Off. Changing the switch settings in this mode will change the display. Test each switch and check to ensure the display changes accordingly. When the Enter button is pressed, regardless of the previous switch setting, switches 1, 5, 9 and 13 will display as a 1 O X Switches 1 or 0 Button Not Pressed =

Pressed =

Switches 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Displayed 1110001001010101 O X 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1110101011011101

1 5 9 13

Signal This option provides for testing the radio path between two 105-U units for a suitable fade margin. Although a pair of units may communicate successfully, radio communication may be affected by a Page 50 March 2000

Chapter Six Troubleshooting range of influences, including atmospheric conditions, changing landscape, degradation of aerials or co-axial cable, low battery voltage etc. Fade margin is an indication of how far a radio path can deteriorate before communication becomes unreliable. When using the Signal feature, a meter is displayed with a mark indicating the current received radio signal level. To check the radio path between two units, select the signal option at the local unit. The remote unit may then be set up for tone reversals (refer 1 above) and the signal level read from the meter. A simpler method when remote units are not easily accessible is to cause a transmission from the local unit to the remote unit (by setting a digital input which maps to the remote unit, for example). The meter will latch the received signal from the remote unit for half a second, allowing the received level to be read. Under normal radio conditions, a reading of 0 indicates a very marginal communication path. For reliable communications, the signal reading should be 3 or above. Minimum signal level for reliable comms

>k Signal 0123456789----

In areas experiencing radio interference or high background noise, reliable communications may not be achievable even with this signal level. To determine if interference is occurring the signal option may be selected without any other 105 units active. In a normal radio environment, no reading should be displayed. If a reading is displayed, then the received signal strength from the remote should be at least three counts higher than the background noise for reliable communication. Displayed signal level of background noise/interference Minimum signal level for reliable comms

>k Signal 0123456789----

>k Signal 0123456789----

When using directional aerials (i.e. YAGI aerials) this feature may be used to peak the received signal level. Set-up the remote unit to transmit tone reversals as described above, and observe the signal indication while adjusting the orientation of the aerial. A peak in signal level indicates optimum orientation of the aerial. man_905_2.1.doc Page 51 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Chapter Seven WARRANTY & SERVICE We are pleased that you have purchased this product. Your purchase is guaranteed against defects for a 365 day warranty period, commencing from the date of purchase. This warranty does not extend to:

Failures caused by the operation of the equipment outside the particular product's specification. use of the 105 module not in accordance with this User Manual, or abuse, misuse, neglect or damage by external causes, or repairs, alterations, or modifications undertaken other than by an authorised Service Agent. Full product specifications and maintenance instructions are available from your Service Agent, your source of purchase, or from the master distributor in your country upon request and should be noted if you are in any doubt about the operating environment for your equipment purchase In the unlikely event of your purchase being faulty, your warranty extends to free repair or replacement of the faulty unit, after its receipt at the master distributor in your country. Our warranty does not include transport or insurance charges relating to a warranty claim. This warranty does not indemnify the purchaser of products for any consequential claim for damages or loss of operations or profits. Should you wish to make a warranty claim, or obtain service, please forward the module to the nearest authorised Service Agent along with proof of purchase. For details of authorised Service Agents, contact your sales distributor. Page 52 March 2000 Appendix A System Example Appendix A SYSTEM EXAMPLE The following example of a system is a comprehensive guide to using some of the features of the 105 range and design of 105 system. The example application is a pump station which supplies water from a reservoir to a tank station. Signals are transferred between the pump station and tank station by radio - the distance between the two stations is 1.5 km (1 mile), and the radio path is heavily obstructed by buildings and trees. A control station is located near the pump station, and there is an existing signal cable between the control station and the pump station. A 105U-1 module is installed at the pump station (with address 1) and a 105U-2 module is installed at the tank station (with address 2). Because the signal cable to the control station does not have enough cores for all of the signals required, the signal cable is used as a RS485 cable and a 105S-3 module is installed at the control station (with address 96). As this module has an address greater than 95, the 105U-1 at the pump station will communicate to it via its serial port. The following diagram represents the system :-

man_905_2.1.doc Page 53 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual The following design points should be noted :-

A test of the radio path between the pump station and the tank station indicated that the radio path would be reliable provided aerials were installed at 6 m above the ground. At each site, the coaxial cable would be approx 10 m in length, so it was decided to use 3 element Yagi aerials with RG58 coaxial cable - the Yagi aerials would compensate for the loss in the cable. The system was installed in a country which permitted the use of 500mW radio power. If this had not been the case, then an intermediate repeater station would have been required. At the tank station, there was an existing light pole with a mains power supply - the light pole was 10m high. Permission was obtained to mount the aerial from the pole and to use the power supply for the radio telemetry module. As there was no existing electrical panel at this station, a small steel enclosure was installed on the light pole. A 2 Amp-Hour sealed battery was installed to provide power during any mains failure. The flow and level transducer were powered from the 24VDC loop supply provided by the 105 module. At the pump station, the aerial was mounted on a 3 m J-bracket installed on the roof of the pump station building. The final height of the aerial was approx 6 m. Care was taken to align the Yagi aerials so they pointed at each other. The Yagi aerials were installed with horizontal polarity

- that is, with the elements horizontal. These aerials will not "hear" other radio users on the same radio channel which generally use vertical polarity. There was an existing electrical enclosure at the pump station, and the 105U module was installed inside this enclosure. The module was powered from 220VAC mains with a 2 Amp Hour sealed battery as backup. At the control station, the 105S module was installed inside the existing control panel enclosure. The module was powered from an existing 24VDC power supply. Page 54 March 2000 Appendix A System Example Tank Station Configuration The 105U-2 module has the following configuration :-

Note the following points in the configuration :

The configuration software used was CFG105-2.EXE as the module is a 105U-2. The system address is 10587 (a random selection) and unit address is 2. PIN1 (the flow meter) is mapped to Out3 (D/P output 3) at #96 which is the control station -

#1 is a repeater. The pulse rate for this PIN (PLSR1) is mapped to Out2 at #97 via #1. This is AO2 of the 105S-3 at the control station. Remember that the 105S-3 has two addresses - the lower address is used for the digital outputs, and the higher address is used for the analogue outputs. man_905_2.1.doc Page 55 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual The pulse rate scaling for PIN1 has been set to 5 Hz to match the maximum flow rate of the flow meter. Note that PIN1 has not been configured for "divide by 10" (for 1000 Hz pulse signals). AIN1 (the level transducer) is mapped to Out1 at #97 via #1. The analogue debounce has been set to 2 sec. This is to avoid any wave action on the surface of the tank causing un-necessary change transmissions. This debounce time will also operate on the PLSR1 value, but as the flow rate changes slowly, this will not affect the performance of this signal. SETPT1 (the set-point status for AI1) is mapped to Out2 (DO2) of #1 (pump station). The set-

point values for SETPT1 have been set to 40% and 75%. When the tank level drops to 40%, DO2 at the pump station will activate to start the pump. When the level rises above 75%, DO2 will reset to stop the pump. The update time for SETPT1 has been changed to 5 minute, as required. An additional mapping has been entered - LOW VOLT has been mapped to Out7 at #96 via

#1 (DO7 at the control station). This mapping is for future use - it will provide a low battery voltage alarm for the tank station. The update time for this mapping has been set to the maximum time of 15 minutes to reduce loading of the radio channel. A Start-up poll has been configured for #1, as DO1 at the tank station is controlled from the pump station. Note that no comms fail reset time has been configured for DO1. As this output drives an indication only, the indication will show the last correct status even during communication failures. Pump Station Configuration The 105U-1 module has the following configuration :-

Page 56 March 2000 Appendix A System Example Note the following points in the configuration :

The configuration software used was CFG105-1.EXE as the module is a 105U-1. The system address is 10587 (same as before) and unit address is 1. DIN1 (pump fault signal) is mapped to Out1 (DO1) at #96 which is the control station. Note that no repeater address is necessary as there is a direct link between #1 and #96. DIN2 (pump running signal) has two mappings - a mapping to DO1 at #2 (tank station) and DO2 at #96 (control station). When DIN2 changes, there will be two separate change messages transmitted - one by radio to #2 and one by serial link to #96. AIN1 (pump amps) is mapped to Out3 at #97 (AO3 at control station). An additional mapping has been entered - LOW VOLT has been mapped to Out8 at #96

(DO8 at the control station). This mapping is for future use - it will provide a low battery voltage alarm for the pump station. A Start-up poll has been configured for #2, as DO2 at the pump station is controlled from the tank station. Note that a comms fail reset time of 11 minutes has been configured for DO2. This means that if a message has not been received for DO2 within 11 minutes, DO2 will reset and switch off the pump. The 11 min time was chosen as it means that two successive update messages have to be missed before the pump is reset, and there is no problems if the pump runs for 11 minutes during a system failure (the tank will not overflow during this time). man_905_2.1.doc Page 57 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Control Station Configuration The 105S-3 module has the following configuration :-

Note the following points in the configuration :

The configuration software used was CFG105-3.EXE as the module is a 105S-3. The system address is 10587 (same as before) and unit address is 96. As the module is a 105-3 module, it will automatically assume addresses #96 and #97. The only mappings are Start-up polls. Note that there are two separate polls, one for each remote module. D/P Out 3 has been configured as a PO. Its pulse output update time is the same as the PI update time at the remote module (both have been left at their default value of 1 minute). Comms fail reset times have been selected for the analogue outputs (21 minutes) but not the Page 58 March 2000 Appendix A System Example digital outputs. In the event of a system failure, the digital outputs will stay at their last correct status, but the analogue outputs will reset to 0 mA. System Failure Alarm After the system had been running for some time, the operators wanted a "system failure" output at the control station, to warn the operators that there was a fault with the system. The following configuration was added :

At #2 (tank station), NOT DI4 Out4 at 96 via 1 ; DI4 Update time = 1 minute At #96 (control station), DO4 Comms fail reset time = 3.5 min At the control station, DO4 was a "system OK" signal. It was normally active - if the signal reset, then this represented a system failure. At the tank station, there is no signal wired to DI4. By mapping NOT DI4 to DO4 at the control station, a message is transmitted every minute to this output to activate it. The message is transmitted via the radio link to #1, and then by the serial link to #96. If anything happened to either module #2 or module #1, or the radio link, or the serial link, then the update messages for DO4 will not be received at the control station module. After 3.5 Minutes, DO4 will reset indicating a problem. The time of 3.5 minutes was selected as this means that 3 successive update messages have to be missed before a system alarm occurs. Also note, that if module #96 fails, DO4 will reset and give an alarm signal. man_905_2.1.doc Page 59

Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Thank you for your selection of the 905 module for your telemetry needs. We trust it will give you many years of valuable service. ATTENTION!

Incorrect termination of supply wires may cause internal damage and will void warranty. To ensure your 905 enjoys a long life, double check ALL your connections with the users manual before turning the power on. Page 2 March 2000 Contents FCC Notice:

This users manual is for the ELPRO 905 series radio telemetry module. This device complies with Part 15.247 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) 2) This device may not cause harmful interference and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device must be operated as supplied by ELPRO Technologies Pty Ltd. Any changes or modifications made to the device without the written consent of ELPRO Technologies Pty. Ltd. May void the users authority to operate the device. End user products that have this device embedded must be supplied with non-standard antenna connectors, and antennas available from vendors specified by ELPRO Technologies. Please contact ELPRO Technologies for end user antenna and connector recommendations. Notices:

Safety:

Exposure to RF energy is an important safety consideration. The FCC has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC regulated equipment as a result of its actions in General Docket 79-144 on March 13, 1996. CAUTION:

To comply with FCC RF Exposure requirements in section 1.1310 of the FCC Rules, antennas used with this device must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons to satisfy RF exposure compliance. DO NOT:

operate the transmitter when someone is within 20 cm of the antenna operate the transmitter unless all RF connectors are secure and any open connectors are properly terminated. operate the equipment near electical blasting caps or in an explosive atmosphere All equipment must be properly grounded for safe operations. All equipment should be serviced only by a qualified technician. man_905_2.0.doc Page 3 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual How to Use This Manual To receive the maximum benefit from your 905 product, please read the Introduction, Installation and Operation chapters of this manual thoroughly before putting the 905 to work. Chapter Four Configuration explains how to configure the modules using the Configuration Software available. For configuration using the on-board switches, refer to the separate 905 Switch Configuration Manual. Chapter Five Specifications details the features of the product and lists the standards to which the product is approved. Chapter Six Troubleshooting will help if your system has problems and Chapter Seven specifies the Warranty and Service conditions. The foldout sheet 905 Installation Guide is an installation drawing appropriate for most applications. Warning !

1. For 905U modules, a radio licence is not required in most countries, provided the module is installed using the aerial and equipment configuration described in the 905 Installation Guide. Check with your local 905 distributor for further information on regulations. 2. 3. 4. 5. For 905U modules, operation is authorised by the radio frequency regulatory authority in your country on a non-protection basis. Although all care is taken in the design of these units, there is no responsibility taken for sources of external interference. The 905 intelligent communications protocol aims to correct communication errors due to interference and to retransmit the required output conditions regularly. However some delay in the operation of outputs may occur during periods of interference. Systems should be designed to be tolerant of these delays. To avoid the risk of electrocution, the aerial, aerial cable, serial cables and all terminals of the 905 module should be electrically protected. To provide maximum surge and lightning protection, the module should be connected to a suitable earth and the aerial, aerial cable, serial cables and the module should be installed as recommended in the Installation Guide. To avoid accidents during maintenance or adjustment of remotely controlled equipment, all equipment should be first disconnected from the 905 module during these adjustments. Equipment should carry clear markings to indicate remote or automatic operation. E.g.

"This equipment is remotely controlled and may start without warning. Isolate at the switchboard before attempting adjustments."

The 905 module is not suitable for use in explosive environments without additional protection. Page 4 March 2000 Contents CONTENTS CHAPTER ONE INTRODUCTION.....................................................................................................................................7 1.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................................7 CHAPTER TWO INSTALLATION................................................................................................................................... 10 2.3 2.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................................................10 10101010POWER SUPPLY ...............................................................................................................................................10 AC Supply..................................................................................................................................................... 11 2.2.1 DC Supply .................................................................................................................................................... 11 2.2.2 2.2.3 Solar Supply ................................................................................................................................................ 12 2.2.4 Multiple Modules........................................................................................................................................ 12 24V Regulated Supply ............................................................................................................................... 13 2.2.5 INPUT / OUTPUT .....................................................................................................................................................13 Digital Inputs (Error! Bookmark not defined.-1 and Error! Bookmark not defined.-2)............... 13 2.3.1 Digital Outputs (Error! Bookmark not defined.-1).............................................................................. 14 2.3.2 Digital Outputs (Error! Bookmark not defined.-2 and Error! Bookmark not defined.-3)............ 16 2.3.3 Analogue Inputs (Error! Bookmark not defined.-1 and Error! Bookmark not defined.-2).......... 16 2.3.4 Analogue Outputs (Error! Bookmark not defined.-1 and Error! Bookmark not defined.-3)....... 17 2.3.5 Pulse Input (Error! Bookmark not defined.-1)..................................................................................... 17 2.3.6 Pulse Inputs (Error! Bookmark not defined.-2)................................................................................... 17 2.3.7 Pulse Output (Error! Bookmark not defined.-1)................................................................................... 18 2.3.8 2.3.9 Pulse Output (Error! Bookmark not defined.-3)................................................................................... 18 2.3.10 RS232 Serial Port....................................................................................................................................... 18 2.3.11 RS485 Serial Port....................................................................................................................................... 19 CHAPTER THREE............................................................................................................................................. OPERATION 22 3.1 3.2 POWER-UP AND NORMAL OPERATION...............................................................................................................22 Communications......................................................................................................................................... 22 Change of state conditions....................................................................................................................... 24 Analogue Set-points................................................................................................................................... 26 Start-up Poll ................................................................................................................................................ 27 Communications Failure (CF)................................................................................................................. 27 Resetting Outputs........................................................................................................................................ 27 SYSTEM DESIGN TIPS.............................................................................................................................................27 System Dynamics......................................................................................................................................... 27 Radio Channel Capacity........................................................................................................................... 28 Radio Path Reliability............................................................................................................................... 28 Design for Failures..................................................................................................................................... 29 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4 3.1.5 3.1.6 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 CHAPTER FOUR.....................................................................................................................................CONFIGURATION 30 4.1 4.2 4.3 INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................................................30 EASY CONFIGURATION USING DEFAULT SETTINGS.........................................................................................31 ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED. CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE ...............................................................33 Hardware Requirements............................................................................................................................ 33 4.3.1 Installation................................................................................................................................................... 34 4.3.2 Software Operation .................................................................................................................................... 34 4.3.3 4.3.4 Changing User Options.................................................................................................................................. 38 4.3.5 Programming / Downloading Configuration........................................................................................ 40 CHAPTER FIVE SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................................................................ 42 CHAPTER SIX..................................................................................................................................TROUBLESHOOTING man_905_2.0.doc Page 5 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual 45 6.1 DIAGNOSTICS CHART .............................................................................................................................................45 SELF TEST FUNCTIONS..........................................................................................................................................45 6.2 Input to Output Reflection (105-1 only)................................................................................................ 45 Radio Testing using Tone Reversals ....................................................................................................... 46 Diagnostics menu........................................................................................................................................ 46 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 CHAPTER SEVEN......................................................................................................................WARRANTY & SERVICE 52 APPENDIX A SYSTEM EXAMPLE................................................................................................................................... 53 Page 6 March 2000 Chapter One Introduction Chapter One INTRODUCTION 1.1 General The 905 range of telemetry modules has been designed to provide standard off-the-shelf telemetry functions, for an economical price. Telemetry is the transmission of signals over a long distance via a medium such as radio or twisted-pair wire. Although the 905 is intended to be simple in its application, it also provides many sophisticated features. This manual should be read carefully to ensure that the modules are configured and installed to give reliable performance. The unit can monitor and control the following types of signals:

Digital on/off signals Example outputs - motor run, siren on Example inputs - motor fault, tank overflow, intruder alarm Analogue continuously variable signals (0-20mA) Example outputs - tank level indication, required motor speed Example inputs - measured tank level, actual motor speed Pulse frequency signals Examples - electricity metering, fluid flow Internal Status signals Examples - analogue battery voltage, power status, solar panel status and low battery status. The unit will monitor the input signals and transmit the signal information by radio or RS485 twisted pair to another 905 module. At the remote unit, the signals will be reproduced as digital, analogue or pulse output signals. The 905 also provides analogue set points, so that a digital output may be configured to turn on and off depending on the value of an analogue input. The pulse I/O transmits an accumulated value and the pulses are reliably recreated at the remote unit regardless of missed transmissions. The actual pulse rate is also calculated and is available as a remote analogue output. This manual covers the 905U and 105S modules. We have provided a summary on all products available in the 905 telemetry range, below. 905U-1, 905U-2 and 905U-3 modules have UHF radio and serial communications. The modules differ only in their input/output (I/O) design, and are compatible, i.e. they can be used to communicate signals to each other in the same network. 105S-1, 105S-2 and 105S-3 modules have only serial communications. All other specifications are as per the 905U-1, 2 & 3 modules. The 105S modules are compatible with 905U modules. 105M-1, 105M-2 and 105M-3 modules are for interfacing to MAP27 trunked radio systems. man_905_2.0.doc Page 7 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual These modules can transmit I/O messages hundreds of kilometres via the trunked radio system. 105M-1, 2 and 3 modules differ only in their input/output (I/O) design, and can interface to 105U and 105S modules. For more information, refer to the 105M User Manual. The 905U-C module provides an interface between host devices such as PLCs or SCADA computers, and a radio telemetry system comprising 905U and 105S radio telemetry modules. The 905U-C allows 905U/105S modules to act as remote wireless I/O for the host devices. For more information, refer to the 905U-C User Manual. Product naming convention:

1 0 5 a - x where a is:

U = UHF radio + RS232/RS485 serial S = RS232/RS485 serial only M = MAP27 trunked radio interface and x is:

1 = Input / Output module 2 = Input module ( includes one output) 3 = Output module C= Interface module 905U-1 105S-1 905U-2 105S-2 905U-3 105S-3

Radio Serial Digital Inputs (DI) Digital Outputs (DO) Analogue Inputs (AI) Analogue Outputs (AO) 4 4 (relay) 2 (4-20mA) 2 (4-20mA) 4 1 (FET) 6 (0-20mA) Pulse Inputs (PI) 1 (100Hz) 4 (1x1KHz, 3x100Hz) Pulse Outputs (PO) 1 (100Hz) Comments PI is DI 1. PO is separate to DO. PIs are the same as POs are the same as DIs. DOs (DO 1-4). The module includes power supply, microprocessor controller, input/output circuits, RS485/232 serial port, and a UHF radio transceiver - no external electronics are required. The 905U version has both radio and serial port communications. The 105S version does not have a radio and has only serial communications. The 905U radio frequency has been selected to meet the requirements Page 8 March 2000 8 (FET) 8 (0-20mA) 4 (100 Hz) Chapter One Introduction of unlicensed operation for remote monitoring and control of equipment. That is, a radio licence is not required for the 905 modules in many countries. See Chapter Five Specifications for details. Input signals connected to a 905 module are transmitted to another 905 module and appear as output signals. These input signals may also be configured to appear as inverted signals on the output. A transmission occurs whenever a "change-of-state" occurs on an input signal. A "change-

of-state" of a digital or digital internal input is a change from "off" to "on" or vice-versa. A "change-

of-state" for an analogue input, internal analogue input or pulse input rate is a change in value of the signal of 3% (configurable from 0.8 to 50 %). In addition to change-of-state messages, update messages are automatically transmitted on a regular basis. The time period may be configured by the user for each input. This update ensures the integrity of the system. Pulse inputs are accumulated as a pulse count and the accumulated pulse count is transmitted regularly according to the configured update time. The 905 modules transmit the input/output data as a data frame using radio or serial RS485 as the communications medium. The data frame includes the "address" of the transmitting 905 module and the receiving 905 module, so that each transmitted message is acted on only by the correct receiving unit. Each transmitted message also includes error checking to ensure that no corruption of the data frame has occurred due to noise or interference. The 905 module with the correct receiving

"address" will acknowledge the message with a return transmission. If the original module does not receive a correct acknowledgement to a transmission, it will retry up to five times before setting the communications fail status of that path. In critical paths, this status can be reflected on an output on the module for alert purposes. The module will continue to try to establish communications and retry, if required, each time an update or change-of-state occurs. A 905 telemetry system may be a complex network or a simple pair of modules. An easy-to-use configuration procedure allows the user to specify any output destination for each input. The maximum number of modules in one system is 95 modules communicating by radio. Each of these modules may have up to 31 other modules connected by RS485 twisted pair. Modules may communicate by radio only, by RS485 only or by both RS485 and radio. Any input signal at any module may be configured to appear at any output on any module in the entire system. Modules can be used as repeaters to re-transmit messages on to the destination module. Repeaters can repeat messages on the radio channel, or from the radio channel to the serial channel (and serial to radio). Up to five repeater addresses may be configured for each input-to-output link. The units may be configured using switches under the plastic cover on the front of the unit or by using a PC connected to the RS232 port. The default configuration is defined in Section 4.2 Easy Configuration Using Default Settings, and software configuration is defined in Section 4.2 905 Configuration Software. Several standard configurations are also available. These are described in the separate 905 Switch Configuration Manual, available from your 905 distributor. man_905_2.0.doc Page 9 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Chapter Two INSTALLATION 2.1 General The 905 module is housed in a rugged aluminium case, suitable for DIN-rail mounting. Terminals are suitable for cables up to 2.5 sqmm in size. Normal 110/220/240V mains supply should not be connected to any input terminal of the 905 module. Refer to Section 2.3 Power Supply. Before installing a new system, it is preferable to bench test the complete system. Configuration problems are easier to recognise when the system units are adjacent. Following installation, the most common problem is poor communications on the radio channel or the serial channel. For radio modules, problems are caused by incorrectly installed aerials, or radio interference on the same channel, or the radio path being inadequate. If the radio path is a problem (i.e. path too long, or obstructions in the way), then higher performance aerials or a higher mounting point for the aerial may fix the problem. Alternately, use an intermediate 905 module as a repeater. For serial modules, poorly installed serial cable, or interference on the serial cable is a common problem. The foldout sheet 905 Installation Guide provides an installation drawing appropriate to most applications. Further information is detailed below. Each 905 module should be effectively earthed via a "GND" terminal on the 905 module - this is to ensure that the surge protection circuits inside the 905 module are effective. 2.2 Power Supply The 905 power supply is a switch-mode design which will accept either AC or DC supply. The 905 module may also be powered from a solar panel without an external solar regulator. The 905 module accepts supply voltages in the following ranges :

12 - 24 volts AC RMS or 15 - 30 volts DC at the supply terminals, or 10.8 -15 volts DC at the battery terminals. Page 10 March 2000 Chapter Two 2.2.1 AC Supply Installation The AC supply is connected to the "SUP1" and "SUP2" terminals as shown below.

The AC supply should be "floating" relative to earth. A 220-240/16 VAC mains "plug-pack" is available for mains applications. 2.2.2 DC Supply For DC supplies, the positive lead is connected to "SUP1" and the negative to "GND". The positive side of the supply must not be connected to earth. The DC supply may be a floating supply or negatively grounded.

The 905 module may also be powered from an external 11 - 15 VDC battery supply without the need for a "normal" supply connected to "SUP1". This external battery supply is connected to

"BAT+" and "GND" terminals. The positive lead of the external supply should be protected by a 2A fuse. Upon failure of the normal supply, the 905 module may continue to operate for several hours from a backup battery. The 905 module includes battery charging circuits for charging up to a 12 AHr sealed lead acid battery. The battery is connected to the "BAT+" (positive) and "GND" (negative) terminals. The positive lead from the battery should be protected with a 2A fuse, installed as near to the battery terminal as possible. On return of main supply, the unit will switch back to mains operation, and recharge the battery. To provide adequate current to recharge the backup battery, an AC supply of 15V minimum or a DC supply of 17V minimum must be used. Typically, a 6 AHr battery will supply the 905 for 1 - 3 days, depending on I/O loads. man_905_2.0.doc Page 11 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual 2.2.3 Solar Supply The 905 power supply also includes a 12 V solar regulator for connecting 12V solar panels of up to 30W, and solar batteries of up to 100AHr. The unit may not be powered from a solar panel without a battery. An 18W solar panel is sufficient for most solar applications. The size of the solar battery required depends on the I/O used. Batteries are sized for a number of sunless days with 50%

battery capacity remaining as follows:

No. of sunless days = Battery capacity (AHr) x 0.5 Module load (A) x 1.2 x 24 The Module load depends on the I/O connected and can be calculated as follows:

Module Load(A) = 0.07 + (0.01 x No. of DIs) + (0.025 x No. of DOs)

+ (2 x Analogue loop load). The analogue loop load is the total signal current for the AIs and AOs which are powered from the internal 24V supply. Externally powered loops are not included in this. The solar panel is connected to the "SOL" (positive) and "GND" (negative) terminals and the battery connected to the "BAT+" (positive) and "GND" (negative) terminals. Solar panels must be installed and connected as per the panel manufacturer's instructions. The positive lead of the battery should be protected by a 2A fuse installed as near as possible to the battery terminal. Where a solar panel larger than 30W is required, an external solar regulator should be used. 2.2.4 Multiple Modules Where more than one module is installed at the one location, a shared power supply and battery may be used, provided the total load does not exceed the power supply. Page 12 March 2000 Chapter Two Installation The internal power supply of the 905 module can supply a maximum 12V load of 700mA. In order to achieve this, the input power supply must be above 15VAC or 17VDC. Using these figures, it can be determined whether there is enough supply for more than one module - allow 100mA for recharging a battery. For example, assume there is a 905U-01 module and a 105S-01 module at the same location. The total I/O at the location is 3 analogue inputs, 6 digital inputs and 4 digital outputs. The total load will be :-

TYPE OF LOAD LOAD mA 905U-01 quiescent 105S-01 quiescent 6 DI @ 10 mA 3 AI @ 20mA x 2 4 DO @ 25mA Battery charging TOTAL 70 45 60 120 100 100 495 So both modules could be powered from one power supply and one battery, provided the external supply voltage is more than 15VAC or 17VDC. 2.2.5 24V Regulated Supply Each 905 module provides a 24V DC regulated supply for analogue loop power. The supply is rated at 150mA, and should only be used for analogue loops. 2.4 Input / Output 2.4.1 Digital Inputs (905-1 and 905-2) man_905_2.0.doc Page 13 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual The 905-1 and 905-2 modules each provide four digital inputs with 5000 volt opto-isolation, suitable for voltage free contacts (such as mechanical switches) or NPN transistor devices (such as electronic proximity switches). Contact wetting current of approximately 5mA is provided to maintain reliable operation of driving relays. Each digital input is connected between the appropriate "DI" terminal and common "COM". Each digital input circuit includes a LED indicator which is lit when the digital input is active, that is, when the input circuit is closed. Provided the resistance of the switching device is less than 200 ohms, the device will be able to activate the digital input. For pulse inputs, refer to Section 2.4.6. 2.4.2 Digital Outputs (905-1) The 905-1 module provides four normally open voltage-free relay contacts, rated at AC3 250V/2A, 120V/5A ; AC1 - 250V/5A ; DC - 30V/2A, 20V/5A. These outputs may be used to directly control low-powered equipment, or to power larger relays for higher powered equipment. When driving inductive loads such as AC relays, good installation should include capacitors (e.g. 10nf 250V) across the external circuit to prevent arcing across the relay contacts. For DC inductive loads, flyback diodes should be used to drive DC relays. Page 14 March 2000 Chapter Two Installation Digital outputs may be configured to individually turn off if no command message is received to that output for a certain period. This feature provides an intelligent watch dog for each output, so that a communications failure at a transmitting site causes the output to revert to a known state. See section 4.4 Changing User Options for further details. The output circuit is connected to the appropriate pair of "DO" terminals. Each digital output circuit includes a LED indicator which is lit when the digital output is active. man_905_2.0.doc Page 15 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual 2.4.3 Digital Outputs (905-2 and 905-3) The digital outputs on the 905-2 and 905-3 modules are transistor switched DC signals, FET output to common rated at 30VDC 500 mA. The 905-2 provides one digital output and the 905-

3 provides eight digital outputs. The first four DOs on the 905-3 module are also the pulse outputs

- that is, the first four DO's can be either digital outputs or pulse outputs. The function of each of these outputs may be configured individually. For a description of pulse outputs, refer to Section 2.4.7. Digital outputs may be configured to individually turn off if no command message is received to that output for a certain period. This feature provides an intelligent watch dog for each output, so that a communications failure at a transmitting site causes the output to revert to a known state. See Chapter 4 Configuration for further details. The output circuit is connected to the appropriate pair of "DO" terminals. Each digital output circuit includes a LED indicator which is lit when the digital output is active. 2.4.4 Analogue Inputs (905-1 and 905-2) The 905-1 module provides two 4 - 20 mA DC analogue inputs for connecting to instrument transducers such as level, moisture, pressure transducers, etc. The 905-2 module provides six 0 -

20 mA DC analogue inputs. Note that the inputs on the 905-2 module will measure down to 0mA, so they can also be used for zero based signals such as 0 - 10 mA. Each analogue input has a positive and negative terminal, and may be placed at any point in the current loop, as long as neither input rises above the 24 volt supply level. Each input has a loop resistance of less than 250 ohms and zener diode protection is provided against over-voltage and reverse voltage, however additional protection may be required in high voltage or noisy environments. A 24VDC supply is available on the 905 module for powering the analogue transducer loops. In this case, the analogue loop should be connected between a "AI 1-" terminal and "COM" ( for the first analogue input) or "AI 2-" ( for the second analogue input), and so on for other inputs. The positive terminal ("AI 1+" or "AI 2+", etc) should be connected to "+24V". Page 16 March 2000 Chapter Two Installation Externally powered loops may be connected by connecting the input between "AI 1+" and AI 1-

for analogue input 1 or "AI 2+" and AI 2- for analogue input 2, and so on for other inputs. Analogue Input 1 "AI 1+" may also be configured to control a high/low analogue set-point. See Chapter 4 Configuration for further details. Common mode voltage may be -0.5V to 27V. Shielded cable is recommended for analogue I/O loops to minimise induced noise and Radio Frequency Interference (RFI). The shield of the cable should be connected to earth at one of the cable only. The use of shielded wiring inside an enclosure containing a 905 module is also recommended. 2.4.5 Analogue Outputs (905-1 and 905-3) The 905-1 module provides two 4 - 20 mA DC analogue outputs for connecting to instrument indicators for the display of remote analogue measurements. The 905-3 module provides eight 0 -

20 mA DC analogue outputs. Each analogue output is a "sink" to common.

A 24VDC supply is available on the 905 module for powering the analogue output loop (max external loop resistance 1000 ohms). In this case, the analogue loop is connected between a "+24V"

terminal and "AO 1" ( for the first analogue output) or "AO 2" (for the second analogue output), and so on for the other output signals. Externally powered loops to 27 VDC may be connected by connecting the output between the

"AO terminal (positive) and the "COM" terminal (negative). Zener protection of analogue outputs provides protection against short periods of over-voltage but longer periods may result in module damage. Note that the 905 common is connected internally to ground and no other point in the analogue loop should be grounded. Analogue outputs may also be configured to individually turn off (0 mA) if no command message is received to that output for a certain period. See Chapter 4 Configuration for further details. 2.4.6 Pulse Input (905-1) For the 905-1 module, digital input 1 may be configured as a pulse input (max rate 100 Hz, min. off time 5 ms). In this mode, both the pulse rate and the pulse count are available for mapping to a remote output. The pulse rate may appear at any analogue output on the remote unit, while the pulse count can appear at a Pulse Output on another 905-1 or Digital Output on a 905-3 unit. The pulse input should be connected in the same way as a digital input. 2.4.7 Pulse Inputs (905-2) man_905_2.0.doc Page 17 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual For the 905-2 module, the four digital inputs (DI 1-4) may be configured as pulse inputs. The first digital/pulse input DI 1 has a maximum rate of 1000 Hz (min. off time 0.5 ms), while DI 2-4 have a maximum rate of 100 Hz (min. off time 5 ms). When using DI 1 at high pulse rates (more than 100 Hz), a divide by 10 function may be configured to reduce the pulse count at the output, as Pulse Outputs have a maximum rate of 100 Hz. For each pulse input, both the pulse rate and the pulse count are available for mapping to a remote output. The pulse rate may appear at any analogue output on the remote unit, while the pulse count can appear at a Pulse Output. The default update time for pulse counts is 1 minute. This can be changed by changing the update time configuration - refer Chapter 4 Configuration for further details. The pulse count is a 16 bit value - roll over of the count when it exceeds the maximum value is automatically handled by the 905 modules. Pulse inputs should be wired in the same way as digital inputs (see Section 2.4.1). 2.4.8 Pulse Output (905-1) A single FET output to common rated at 30VDC, 500 mA is provide for the pulse output "PO". This output accurately recreates the pulses counted at a pulse input at a 905-1 or 905-2 module. Although the count is accurately re-created, the rate of output pulses may not accurately reflect the input rate. The actual input pulse rate may be configured to appear at an analogue output if required. Note that the pulse rate and accumulated value will remain accurate even if a period of communications failure has occurred. The maximum output rate is 100 Hz. If a high speed pulse input is used (more than 100 Hz) on PI1 of a 905-2 module, the pulse input count should not be transmitted to a PO on the 905-1 or DO on the 905-3 without configuring the divide-by-10 function

(on the 905-2 module) 2.4.9 Pulse Output (905-3) The first four digital outputs on the 905-3 module may also be used as pulse outputs. The outputs are FET output to common rated at 30VDC, 500 mA. The outputs will provide a pulse signal of up to 100 Hz. The outputs accurately recreate the pulses counted at pulse inputs at a 905-1 or 905-2 module. Although the count is accurately re-created, the rate of output pulses may not accurately reflect the input rate. The actual input pulse rate may be configured to appear at an analogue output if required. Note that the pulse rate and accumulated value will remain accurate even if a period of communications failure has occurred. 2.4.10 RS232 Serial Port Page 18 March 2000 Chapter Two Installation The serial port is a 9 pin DB9 female and provides for connection to a terminal or to a PC for configuration, field testing and for factory testing. This port is internally shared with the RS485 -

ensure that the RS485 is disconnected before attempting to use the RS232 port. Communication is via standard RS-232 signals. The 905 is configured as DCE equipment with the pin-out detailed below. The serial port communicates at a baud rate of 9600 baud, 8 bits, no parity, one stop bit. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Name DCD RD TD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI Dirn Function Out Out In In

Out In Out

Data carrier detect - not used Transmit Data - Serial Data Input (High = 0, Low = 1) Receive Data - Serial Data Output (High = 0, Low = 1) Data Terminal Ready - not used Signal Ground Data Set Ready - not used Request to Send - not used Clear to send - not used Ring indicator - not used. An example cable drawing for connection to a laptop is detailed below:

MALE FEMALE 2.4.11 RS485 Serial Port The RS485 port provides for communication between multiple 905 units using a multi-drop cable. Up to 32 units may be connected in each multi-drop network. Each multi-drop network may have one unit providing radio communications with other units in the system. The RS485 feature allows local hubs of control to operate without occupying radio bandwidth required for communication between remotely sited units. man_905_2.0.doc Page 19 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual The RS485 Communications format is 9600 baud, 8 data bits, one stop bit, no parity. Note that the RS485 port is shared internally with the RS232 port - disconnect the RS232 cable after configuration is complete. Page 20 March 2000 Chapter Two Installation RS485 is a balanced, differential standard but it is recommended that shielded, twisted pair cable be used to interconnect modules to reduce potential Radio Frequency Interference (RFI). An RS485 network should be wired as indicated in the diagram below and terminated at each end of the network with a 120 ohm resistor.

man_905_2.0.doc Page 21 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Chapter Three OPERATION 3.1 Power-up and Normal Operation When power is initially connected to the 905 module, the module will perform internal diagnostics to check its functions. The following table details the status of the indicating LEDs on the front panel under normal operating conditions. LED Indicator OK RX RX RX TX

(only on 905U units) PWR OK Condition On Occasional flash Flashes continuously On Occasional flash On Flashes every 5 seconds Meaning Normal Operation Radio Receiving, or Activity on serial ports Configuration Mode Button press when entering Configuration Mode Radio Transmitting Supply voltage available from Solar Panel or SUP1/SUP2

+24V Supply overloaded Additional LEDs provide indication of the status of digital inputs and outputs. LEDs display the status of each digital input (lit for active), and LEDs display the status of each digital output (lit for active). Other conditions indicating a fault are described in Chapter Six Troubleshooting. The 905 module monitors the power supply and provides status of supply failure and battery low voltage for "mapping" to one of the module's own outputs or transmitting to a remote output. When the 905 module is powered from a normal supply (i.e. via either of the SUP terminals), the PWR LED indicator is lit. When the 905 modules is powered from a solar panel and battery, the PWR LED indicator is lit only when the charge current is available (i.e. when the solar panel is receiving light). In the event of excessively low battery voltage (10.8V), the OK LED will go off, the unit will automatically set all outputs off, and disable the +24V analogue loop supply. the OK LED will turn on again after the battery voltage exceeds 11.3V. This enables installations to be configured so that the battery current drain is minimised in the event of extended mains failure, reducing the possibility of deep discharge of batteries. 3.1.1 Communications If transmissions are not successful, then the 905 module will re-try up to four times at random intervals to transmit the message. If communications is still not successful, the Comms Fail internal status will be set. In the default configuration, this will have no consequence and the 905 module will Page 22 March 2000 Chapter Three Operation continue to attempt to transmit to the remote module every ten minutes. For critical applications, this status can be configured to be reflected to an output on the module for alert purposes. The outputs on the module may also be configured to reset after a specified timeout (digital outputs reset to off, analogue outputs reset to 0 mA) allowing the system to turn off in a controlled manner e.g. a pump will never be left running because of a system failure. Example of Successful Communications Local Unit Listen to ensure channel is clear If clear, transmit message TX LED flashes if radio RX LED flashes if RS485 RX LED flashes Acknowledgement received okay -

communication complete Example of unsuccessful communications Local Unit Listen to ensure channel is clear If clear, transmit message TX LED flashes if radio RX LED flashes if RS485 No acknowledgement received Retry up to four times Still no acknowledgement

(4) Comms fail status to remote unit set If status is mapped to an output, set output Remote Unit Receive message RX LED flashes Check message for integrity If message okay, transmit it back as acknowledgement TX LED flashes if radio RX LED flashes if RS485 Outputs updated as per message received. Remote Unit Receive message RX LED flashes Check message for integrity Message corrupted nothing

- do If no update received for an output within watchdog timeout, check to see if the output is configured to reset Reset outputs if configured man_905_2.0.doc Page 23 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Repeaters can be used in a system to increase range. Each 905U unit can be configured to act as a repeater. When configuring an input to be mapped to an output, the communications path to the output unit, including the repeater addresses is specified. The 905U acts as a digital repeater, that is, the signal is decoded and then retransmitted as new. Example Repeater Communications Unit A DI 1 mapped to Unit D DO1 via Units B & C Unit A DI 1 is turned on Transmit Receive Acknowledge Unit B Repeater Unit C Repeater Unit D Receive Transmit on with Acknowledge Receive Acknowledge Receive Transmit on with Acknowledge Receive Acknowledge Receive Transmit acknowledge DO 1 is turned on 3.1.2 Change of state conditions The 905 module transmits a data message whenever it detects a "change-of-state" on one of its input signals. A "change-of-state" of a digital or digital internal input is a change from "off" to "on" or vice-

versa provided the change is sustained for 0.5 second (i.e. 0.5 second debounce). In addition to "change-of-state" transmissions, each module will transmit the status of each input to its corresponding output every ten minutes (configurable). These updates mean that the outputs are set to the current input values regularly, even where no change-of-state has occurred. These update transmissions increase the accuracy of the output and give extra system reliability. Analogue Change-of-state A "change-of-state" for an analogue input, battery voltage or pulse input rate is a change in value of the signal of 3% (configurable) since the last transmission. Note that the sensitivity of 3% refers to 3% of the analogue range, not 3% of the instantaneous analogue value. That is, if an analogue input changes from 64% (14.24 mA) to 67% (14.72 mA), a "change-of-state" will be detected. This change-of-state sensitivity is configurable between 0.8% and 50%. Analogue inputs are digitally filtered to prevent multiple transmissions on continually varying or

"noisy" signals. The input is filtered with a 1 second time constant and a 1 second debounce. The analogue outputs are filtered with a 1 second time constant. An example explaining the interaction of these figures is shown below. In general, the following may be used as a rule of thumb for Page 24 March 2000 Chapter Three Operation calculating the appropriate sensitivity required for a given application:

Instantaneous change of 2 x sensitivity on input Instantaneous change of 10 x sensitivity on input The analogue inputs have 15 bit resolution and 0.016mA accuracy. An example of an analogue input and how the output follows it is shown below:

3 second output response 5 second output response Pulse input change of state Pulse input counts do not use change-of-state transmissions. Instead, accumulated pulse input counts are transmitted at set intervals. The default period is 1 minute and is configurable. Note that the pulse outputs are re-created from the accumulated pulse count. If a transmission is missed, the pulse output will still be re-created when the next accumulated value is transmitted. This ensures that no pulses are lost due to communications failures. The following diagram shows how pulse inputs are re-created as pulse outputs. For pulse outputs, the 905 module keeps two counters in memory - the pulse input count received from the remote 905 module, and the count of output pulses. When the 905 receives an update of the input pulse count, it will output pulses until the output pulse count is the same as the input pulse count. The man_905_2.0.doc Page 25 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual output pulse will be output evenly over the pulse output update time which is configured in the module. For example, assume that 905 module receives a pulse input update message from the remote 905 module, and the difference between the pulse input count and the pulse output count is 12 pulses. The 905 will then output the 12 pulses evenly over the next minute (if the pulse output update time is 1 minute). The default values for the pulse input update time and pulse output update time is 1 minute. In this case, the output pulses are effectively 1 minute behind the input pulses. These update times may be changed by the user. The pulse output update time should not be set to be more than the pulse input update time. Note that the maximum pulse rate for both inputs and outputs is 100Hz. PI update time Input Pulses Output Pulses Time Time PO update time As well as accumulating the pulse input, the 905 module will also calculate the rate of pulses. Pulse rates are treated as an internal analogue input and are configured with analogue sensitivities for change-of-state transmissions. The maximum pulse rate corresponding to 20mA output may be configured by the user. 3.1.3 Analogue Set-points On 905-1 modules, the AI 1 input may be used to trigger the analogue set-point status. High set point and low set point levels are configurable. This set-point status turns ON when the analogue input moves below the low level, and turns OFF when it moves above the high level. The high level must always be greater than, or equal to, the low level set point. This set-point status may be mapped (inverted, if required) to any output in the network. The set-point status is effectively an internal digital input. On 905-2 modules, each analogue input has set-point values for controlling digital outputs. The Page 26 March 2000 Chapter Three Operation set-point operation works as for the 905-1 module. 3.1.4 Start-up Poll After a 905 module has completed its initial diagnostics following power up, it will transmit update messages to remote modules based on the values of the modules inputs. The modules outputs will remain in the reset/off/zero condition until it receives update or change-of-state messages from the remote modules. The 905 module can transmit a special start-up poll message to another module. The remote module will then immediately send update messages to this module such that its outputs can be set to the correct value. Start-up polls will only occur if they are configured. It is necessary to configure a start-up poll to each remote module which controls the modules outputs. For further information, refer to Chapter 4 Configuration. 3.1.5 Communications Failure (CF) The internal communications failure (CF) status is set if a module does not receive an acknowledgement message after five attempts at transmitting a message. The CF status may be configured to set a local digital output for an external alarm. Although the CF status can set an output, it will not reset the output. That is, once communications is re-established (and the CF status is reset), the output will stay on. The Reset Output feature

(see below) is used to reset the output. The output will reset only when no communications failures occur within the configured Reset Output Time for the output that CF status is mapped to. Note that if the reset output time is not enabled, the CF status will remain set forever, once an unsuccessful transmission occurs. See Chapter 4 Configuration for further details. 3.1.6 Resetting Outputs Each digital and analogue output may be individually configured to reset if that output has not received a change-of-state or an update message within a certain time period. Generally this time is set to twice the update period, so at least one update can be missed before an output is reset. In most cases it is desirable to reset outputs which are controlling equipment if there is a system failure, however alarm or indication outputs are not reset so the last valid indication remains shown. See Chapter 4 Configuration for further details. 3.2 System Design Tips The following tips will help to ensure that your system operates reliably. 3.2.1 System Dynamics It is important to be aware of the dynamics of the 905 system. Digital inputs have a minimum debounce delay of 0.5 sec - that is, a change message will not be sent for 0.5 sec after a change man_905_2.0.doc Page 27 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual has occurred. Analogue inputs and outputs have time delays of 1 to 2 seconds. Messages transmitted via serial link are received in less than 20 mSec, however a message sent by radio takes approx 100 mSec. These delays are not significant is most applications, however if your application requires faster responses, then the above delays need to be considered. 3.2.2 Radio Channel Capacity Messages sent on a cable link are much faster than on a radio channel, and the capacity of the radio channel must be considered when designing a system. This becomes more important as the I/O size of a system increases. The 905 modules are designed to provide real-time operation. When an input signal changes, a change message is sent to change the output. The system does not require continuous messages to provide fast operation (as in a polling system). Update messages are intended to check the integrity of the system, not to provide fast operation. Update times should be selected based on this principle. The default update time is 10 minutes - we recommend that you leave these times as 10 minutes unless particular inputs are very important and deserve a smaller update time. It is important that radio paths be reliable. For large systems, we recommend a maximum radio channel density of 100 messages per minute, including change messages and update messages. We suggest that you do not design for an average transmission rate of greater than 50 per minute - this will give a peak rate of approx 100 per minute. Note that this peak rate assumes that all radio paths are reliable - poor radio paths will require re-try transmissions and will reduce the peak channel density. If there are other users on the radio channel, then this peak figure will also decrease. The 905 modules will only transmit one message at a time. If re-tries are necessary, another message cannot start. The time between re-tries is a random time between 1 and 5 seconds. The time for five tries is between 5 and 21 seconds. Another message cannot be sent until the last one has finished. This delay will obviously have an affect on a busy system. 3.2.3 Radio Path Reliability Radio paths over short distances can operate reliably with a large amount of obstruction in the path. As the path distance increases, the amount of obstruction which can be tolerated decreases. At the maximum reliable distance, line-of-sight is required for reliable operation. If the path is over several kilometres (or miles), then the curvature of the earth is also an obstacle and must be allowed for. For example, the earth curvature over 10 km is approx 3m, requiring aerials to be elevated at least 4m to achieve line-of-sight even if the path is flat. A radio path may act reliably in good weather, but poorly in bad weather - this is called a marginal radio path. If the radio path is more than 20% of the maximum reliable distance (see Specification section for these distances), we recommend that you test the radio path before installation. Each 905U module has a radio path testing feature - refer to section 6.2 of this manual. Page 28 March 2000 Chapter Three Operation There are several ways of improving a marginal path :-

Relocate the unit to a better position. If there is an obvious obstruction causing the problem, then locating the unit to the side or higher will improve the path. If it is not practical to improve a marginal path, then the last method is to use another module as a repeater. A repeater does not have to be between the two modules (although often it is). If possible, use an existing module in the system which has good radio path to both modules. The repeater module can be to the side of the two modules, or even behind one of the modules, if the repeater module is installed at a high location (for example, a tower or mast). Repeater modules can have their own I/O and act as a normal 905U module in the system. 3.2.4 Design for Failures All well designed systems consider system failure. I/O systems operating on a wire link will fail eventually, and a radio system is the same. Failures could be short-term (interference on the radio channel or power supply failure) or long-term (equipment failure). The 905 modules provide the following features for system failure :-

Outputs can reset if they do not receive a message within a configured time. If an output should receive an update or change message every 10 minutes, and it has not received a message within this time, then some form of failure is likely. If the output is controlling some machinery, then it is good design to switch off this equipment until communications has been re-established. The 905 modules provide a drop outputs on comms fail time. This is a configurable time value for each output. If a message has not been received for this output within this time, then the output will reset (off, in-active, 0). We suggest that this reset time be a little more than twice the update time of the input. It is possible to miss one update message because of short-term radio interference, however if two successive update messages are missed, then long term failure is likely and the output should be reset. For example, if the input update time is 3 minutes, set the output reset time to 7 minutes. A 905 module can provide an output which activates on communication failure to another module. This can be used to provide an external alarm that there is a system fault. man_905_2.0.doc Page 29 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Chapter Four CONFIGURATION 4.1 Introduction The 905 modules may be configured by connecting a computer (PC) using the 905 Configuration Software programme. Alternatively, the module may be configured by the on-board miniature switches located under the blue cover on the front of the module. This chapter describes the default configuration of the module and using the Configuration Software Programme. For details on switch configuration, please refer to the separate 905 Switch Configuration Manual, available from 905 distributors. Each 905 module is configured with a system address and a unit address. The system address is common to every module in the same system, and is used to prevent "cross-talk" between modules in different systems. Separate networks with different system addresses may operate independently in the same area without affecting each other. The system address may be any number between 1 and 32 767. The actual value of the system address is not important, provided all modules in the same system have the same system address value. A system address of zero should not be used. Each unit must have a unique unit address within the one system. A valid unit address is 1 to 127. A network may have up to 95 individual modules communicating via radio (unit addresses 1 to 95), each with up to 31 modules communicating via RS485 (unit addresses 96 to 127). In the network, any individual input signal may be "mapped" to one or more outputs anywhere in the system. The unit address determines the method of communication to a module. Any module with a unit address between 96 and 127 will communicate by RS485 only. Other units with a unit address below 95 may communicate by radio or RS485 - the unit will determine which way to communicate depending upon the unit address of the destination module. For example, Unit 31 will talk to Unit 97 by RS485 only, but will talk to unit 59 by radio only. 105S units must always have a unit address between 96 and 127 as serial communication is the only method of communication available. A unit address of zero should not be used. The three different products in the range can be used together in the same system. Inputs to one product type can be transmitted to outputs of another product type. For example, an analogue input to a 905-2 may be transmitted to an analogue output of a 905-1 or 905-3. Repeaters may be any product type. The 905-1 and 905-2 modules require only one unit address. The 905-3 module uses two addresses, however only one unit address has to be entered. The 905-3 module requires two addresses because of the large number of output channels. If the entered" unit address is an even number, then the second address is the next number. If the "entered" address is an odd number, then the second address is the previous number. So the two addresses are two subsequent numbers, starting with an even number. If a 905-3 module is given a unit address of 10, then it will also take up the unit address 11 and will accept messages addressed to either 10 or 11. It is important to remember this when allocating unit addresses to other modules in the system. Page 30 March 2000 Chapter Four Configuration Warning - do not allocate the address number 1 to a 905-3 module. In addition to these network configurations, operational parameters called User Options may be configured to change the features of the 905 operation. These parameters may be configured using the Configuration Software of configuration switches (see 905 Switch Configuration Manual) 4.2 Easy Configuration Using Default Settings If your application requires only a single pair of 905 modules, communicating via radio or serial link, default settings may satisfy your needs. If so, no configuration is required. Essentially, all inputs at Module A are reflected at the corresponding outputs at Module B. All inputs at Module B are reflected at the corresponding outputs at Module A. For 905-1 modules, the default configuration is as follows :-

In this configuration, the PO Pulse output is inactive and no special action is taken on Comms fail, Mains fail or Battery Low. DI 1 is configured as a digital and not a pulse input. man_905_2.0.doc Page 31 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual For 905-2 and 905-3 modules, the default configuration is as follows :-

The following table details the default values for User Options:

Option Update transmissions Analogue Change-of-state sensitivity Reset outputs on Comms fail Analogue Setpoints (if mapped) Pulse Output Rate Scaling

(if Pulse Rate is mapped) Digital Input Debounce Time Factory Set Value Every 10 minutes 3%

No Low Set point = 30%

High Set point = 75%

100 Hz 0.5 seconds If any of the above values are not appropriate to your system, Section 4.4 below will detail how to change one or all of the above variables. Page 32 March 2000 Chapter Four 4.3 Configuration 905 Configuration Software This chapter describes installation and operation of configuration software for the 905 radio and serial telemetry modules. Configuration software eliminates the need for configuration of the unit via the 16 DIL switches under the blue plastic plug.. This software provides all of the functions available through the switch configuration as well as additional configuration options not available through switch configuration. The configuration software runs on a conventional PC as a DOS programme. The software creates a configuration file that can be loaded into a 905 module via RS232. The configuration software also allows the configuration of a 905 module to be downloaded for display and modification. Configuration files can be saved to disk for later retrieval. Configuration of 905 modules consists of entering I/O mappings, and selecting User Options. An I/O mapping is a link between an input on the module being configured and an output on another module. A mapping has the form :-

DI3 Out2 at 4 via 3, 11 This mapping links DI3 on this module to output channel 2 on the module with address 4, and modules 3 and 11 are repeaters. Up to 32 mappings may be entered for each module. User Options may be selected to change the configuration of specific features. IBM or compatible PC (386 or higher) with MS-DOS, MS-Windows 3.1, Windows-95/98 4.3.1 Hardware Requirements 3.5" 1.44M floppy drive (for software installation) At least one serial port (preferably two serial ports to allow mouse operation). RS-232 serial cable as shown below. 905 End DB9 Male DB9 female PC End 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Required Optional man_905_2.0.doc Page 33 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual 4.3.2 Installation Running from floppy disk The software may be run directly from the distribution disk. If the software is to be used in this manner, a copy of the distribution disk should be made, and the copy used to run the software. Installing to a hard disk Most users will want to install the configuration software to the hard disk of their computer. This may be simply achieved by creating a directory on the destination hard disk and copying the contents of the distribution disk to the hard disk. For example, if the destination hard disk is drive C: and the distribution floppy is in drive A: the following sequence of instructions may be used. C:> MKDIR CFG105 C:> COPY A:\*.EXE CFG105 Hints for Windows Users For slower machines, the software should be run in Full Screen and Exclusive mode under Windows. If problems are experienced, exit windows and run the program from DOS. 4.3.3 Software Operation Running from MS-DOS Start the software by entering the directory where the configuration program is stored, and entering the executable file name. For example, if the executable is stored in C:\CFG105 type the following C:\> CD CFG105 C:\CFG105> CFG105-1 To configure a 905-1 module C:\CFG105> CFG105-2 To configure a 905-2 module C:\CFG105> CFG105-3 To configure a 905-3 module and press the <ENTER> key. Running from MS-Windows Select the Run... option from the Start menu. In the Command Line Box type:

C:\CFG105\CFG105-1 To configure a 905-1 module, C:\CFG105\CFG105-2 To configure a 905-2 module, C:\CFG105\CFG105-3 To configure a 905-3 module, and press the <ENTER> key. The Initial screen will appear as below. Page 34 March 2000 Chapter Four Configuration This screen shows the system address, unit address, a summary of all of the mappings configured, and the current file (if any) being used. To move between editing the system address, unit address, and configuration mappings, use the <TAB> key, or use the <ALT> key in conjunction with the highlighted letter. Alternatively, simply click on the appropriate section with the mouse. Changing the system address and unit address To change the system address and unit address, simply move to the appropriate box using the

<TAB> key or the <ALT> + letter keys, or mouse click, and type in a new number or use the arrow keys to edit the old number. Entering a new mapping To enter a new mapping, move to the Mappings section of the screen using the <TAB>, <ALT> +

M keys or the mouse. Hit the <INS> key or double click the left mouse button to bring up a dialogue box as shown below. Select the desired mapping type and hit the <ENTER> key or select OK to continue. Input/Output Standard mapping of an input to an output at another unit. Poll Start-up poll of a remote unit to ensure data is up to date Comms Fail Set a local output on comms fail to a remote site man_905_2.0.doc Page 35 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Changing an existing mapping Select the mapping to change using the mouse or arrow keys, and either press the <ENTER> key, or click the right mouse button. Deleting an existing mapping Select the mapping to delete using the mouse or arrow keys, and press the <DEL> key to delete the mapping. A message asks for confirmation to ensure mappings are not deleted accidentally. Configuring Input/Output mapping types On selecting an Input/Output type mapping, a dialogue box allows entry of the desired mapping. Depending on the type of unit being configured (905-1, 905-2, or 905-3), the dialogue box will vary. The following is the display for configuration of Input/Output mappings on a 905-1 module. The 905-2 module has 32 different inputs, and the 10GenericName-3 module has only 4 inputs. Item Input Output Meaning The input to be mapped. The output (usually at a remote site) at which the signal is to appear. Destination Address The address of the site where the output is to appear. Store And Forward The addresses of any intermediate repeater units needed to reach the destination address (entered in order of nearest to furthermost repeater). Invert Optional inversion of the signal (905-1 and 905-3 only). Page 36 March 2000 Chapter Four Configuration Select the desired mapping configuration, then press <ENTER> or select the OK button on the dialogue box to return to the main screen. Outputs are identified by the corresponding output name for each type of destination module. These correspond to the outputs of the various 905 modules as follows:

905-1 Output 905-2 Output 905-3 address (Even) First 905-3 address (Odd) Second Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 DOT 1 DOT 2 DOT 3 DOT 4 AOT 1 AOT 2 PULSE OUT None Configuring Start-Up Polls DOT 1 None None None None None None None DOT/PULSE 1 DOT/PULSE 2 DOT/PULSE 3 DOT/PULSE 4 DOT 5 DOT 6 DOT 7 DOT 8 AOT 1 AOT 2 AOT 3 AOT 4 AOT 5 AOT 6 AOT 7 AOT 8 When a unit is first turned on, its outputs will not be set until it receives update messages from any other units in the system which have inputs configured to appear at those outputs. To ensure that outputs are set as soon as possible after start-up the unit may be configured to Poll any other units with mappings to its outputs. This is achieved by selecting Poll from the Mapping Type dialogue box. If Poll is selected from the mapping type dialogue box, then the following dialogue box is displayed. Enter the address of the unit to poll in the Destination address section, and the addresses of any intermediate units required to reach this unit in the Store and Forward section (starting with the nearest repeater address). Configuring Comms Fail Mappings In situations where an indication of unsuccessful communication (comms) to a remote module is required, an output at the local module may be turned on in the event of unsuccessful comms. man_905_2.0.doc Page 37 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Successful comms does not turn off the output, so the Drop outputs on comms fail (Refer below) time should be set to a period similar to the update time for the remote. This allows comms fail indication to multiple remotes to be configured to appear at the same output, which acts as a general comms fail indication. Configuring a Comms Fail Address of zero causes communication failure to any destination module to be indicated on the selected output. For example, if Comms fail to unit 12 is configured to DO1, then the 905 module will set (or activate) DO1 each time communications to unit 12 is not successful. If DO1 has a Drop outputs on comms fail time configured of 10 minutes, then DO1 will reset (de-activate) 10 minutes after the last comms fail to unit 12. Enter the output at which the comms fail indication is to appear, and the address for which the comms fail should be indicated. Saving and Loading Configurations to / from Disk It is strongly recommended that the configuration for each unit in the system is saved to a backup file. In the unlikely event of unit failure, a replacement unit may be quickly configured from the saved file. When editing a configuration is complete, it may be saved to a disk file for future use, or for further editing. The File menu on the top menu bar provides access to saving and restoring configuration files. Files are stored with the default extension .905 for 905-1 configurations, extension .205 for 905-2 configurations and .305 for 905-3 configurations. Standard file dialogue boxes for Load, Save, and Save As commands provide simple file management. When a file is loaded or saved the status line at the bottom of the screen Current File changes to indicate the name of the current file. 4.3.4 Changing User Options User options allow a variety of parameters of the 905 module to be modified to suit a particular application. User Options are available through the User Options menu on the top menu bar. User options are Page 38 March 2000 Chapter Four Configuration Update Times Analogue Sensitivity Reset Output on Comms Fail Digital/Analogue Debounce (905-1 and 905-2 only) Analogue Debounce (905-2 only) Set-points (905-1 and 905-2 only) Pulse Rate Scale (905-1 and 905-2 only) Pulse Output Update (905-1 and 905-3 only) Update Times allows configuration of how frequently each configured mapping is updated

(Integrity Update). The period of update (check) transmissions may be configured individually for each input. The default period is 10 minutes for all inputs, except for pulse inputs (1 minute). Note that this is the check transmission time - updates will also be sent on any change-of-state on each input. It is important here to keep in mind the principle - Less radio traffic means better communications. Short update times should only be used in special circumstances, or when an RS-485 network is used, and the message is not transmitted over a radio link. Frequent updates from multiple units causes congestion of the radio channel, which results in increased communication failures and general performance degradation of the system. Analogue Sensitivity allows configuration of the change required in an analogue input before a Change Of State is detected, and the new analogue value is transmitted. For input signals which vary widely over a short period of time or have a normal oscillation, the analogue sensitivity should be set to an appropriately large value. This ensures that many change messages are not transmitted in too short a time. This will result in channel congestion, as described in the preceding section. Reset Output on Comms Fail allows the Comms Fail Time to be selected - this is the time for an output to reset if it has not received an update or change message. Each output on the unit, either analogue or digital, may be configured to reset (off or 0mA) when no update transmission has been received for a certain time. The default condition is zero (no reset). This option can be used to ensure that communications failure will not result in loss of control. For example, outputs connected to pumps should be configured to reset on communications failure so that the pump will turn off. If the reset time is less than the update time, then the output will reset when the reset time expires, and then set again when the update message is received. We recommend that the reset time be a little more than twice the update time. Debounce is the time which an input must stay stable before the 905 module decides that a change of state has occurred. If the input changes (say 0 0) in less than the debounce time, then the 905 module will ignore both changes. Debounce may be configured for digital inputs on the 905-1 and 905-2 modules (0.5 - 8 seconds) and the analogue inputs on the 1) and changes again (1 man_905_2.0.doc Page 39 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual 905-2 module (0.5 - 8 seconds). The default value of 0.5 seconds is suitable for most applications. In applications where a digital input may turn on and off several times slowly (for example, security switches or float switches) a debounce time of up to 8 seconds may be configured. The configured debounce time has no affect on pulse inputs. Note that the analogue debounce is not configurable for the 905-1, but is configurable in the 905-2. Set-points allow a remote digital output to be turned on and off depending on the value of an analogue input. The set-point status internal input must be mapped to an output for this option to have effect. When the AI is less than the Low Set-point (LSP), the set-point status will be active

(on, 1) - when the AI is more than the High Set Point (HSP), the set-point status will be reset

(off, 0). Note that the High Set Point (HSP) must always be higher than the Low Set Point

(LSP). For the 905-1 module, only AI1 has set-point values. For 905-2 modules, all six analogue inputs have set-points. Debounce time operates on the set-point status in the same way as digital inputs. Pulse Rate Scale is used when pulse rate is mapped to an analogue output. The pulse rate scale configures the maximum expected pulse input frequency. This is the frequency for which the pulse rate input indicates the maximum value (20 mA if mapped to an analogue output). On the 905-1, the maximum value is 100 Hz. On the 105-2, the maximum value is 1000 Hz for input 1, and 100 Hz for inputs 2-4. Pulse input 1 on the 905-2 module can measure pulse signals up to 1000 Hz, however all pulse outputs have a maximum rate of only 100 Hz. For pulse inputs greater than 100 Hz, a Divide-by-

10 function should be configured. The input count is then divided by 10 before transmitting. The default is 100Hz (no divide-by-10). Where the 1000Hz option is configured, then each output pulse means 10 pulses (or 10 counts). Pulse Output Update is the time which pulses are output after a PI update is received. It should be configured to correspond to the pulse input update time for the corresponding pulse input. This ensures that the pulse output rate matches as closely as possible the pulse input rate which it is reflecting. For example, if the PI update time is 1 minute, then the PO update time should also be 1 minute. If the PI update time is changed, then the PO update time at the remote module should be also changed. The PO will still operate if the time is not changed, however pulses may be output faster or slower than the input pulses. 4.3.5 Programming / Downloading Configuration Transferring configuration to the 905 Module Once editing of the configuration is complete, the configuration must be loaded into the 905 before the new configuration takes effect. Before proceeding, close any other programmes on the PC that is using the communications port. Connect the cable from the PCs serial port to the 905 serial port. From the Communication menu, select Select Comms Port Page 40 March 2000 Chapter Four Configuration Select the appropriate serial port from the list provided (COM1 - COM4) From the Communication menu, select Program The 105 The configuration program will now attempt to download the configuration data to the 905 module. If all goes well, a Programming prompt will appear. This prompt will remain until programming of the 905 is complete. If the 905 is not correctly connected, or is not turned on, it may take up to a minute for the configuration program to stop trying to connect to the 905. Loading existing Configuration from the 905 To download the configuration from a 905 for editing or simply for checking, follow the following steps:

Connect the cable from the PCs serial port to the 905 serial port. From the Communication menu, select Select Comms Port Select the appropriate serial port from the list provided (COM1 - COM4) From the Communication menu, select Load Config from 105 The configuration program will now attempt to upload the configuration data from the 905. If all goes well, a Loading prompt will appear. This prompt will remain until loading of data from the 905 is complete. If the 905 is not correctly connected, or is not turned on, it may take up to a minute for the configuration program to stop trying to connect to the 905. man_905_2.0.doc Page 41 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Chapter Five SPECIFICATIONS General Radio standards 905U Housing Terminal blocks LED indication Operating Temperature Power Supply Battery supply AC supply DC supply FCC Part 15.247 130 x 185 x 60mm DIN rail mount Removable 902 928 MHz, 1W Powder-coated, extruded aluminium Suitable for 2.5 mm2 conductors Power supply, OK operation, digital I/O, RX and TX

-20 to 60 degrees C 11.3 - 15.0 VDC 12 - 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz Overvoltage protected 15 - 30 VDC Overvoltage and protected reverse voltage Mains supply 110-250 VAC via plug-pack transformer Battery Charging circuit Solar regulator Included Included Current Drain 70 mA quiescent for U 45 mA quiescent for S for 1.2-12 ahr sealed lead acid battery Direct connection of solar panel (up to 30W) and solar battery (100 Ahr)

+ 10 mA/active digital input

+ 25 mA/active digital output

+ 2 x analogue I/O loop (mA) 24V DC 150 mA Can be transmitted to remote modules As above Included Monitored Monitored Analogue loop supply Mains fail status Battery voltage Radio Transceiver (905U) Type Frequency Transmit power Spread Spectrum 902 - 928 Mhz Fixed Frequency Hopping 250 kHz channel spacing 1 W Signal detect / RSSI

-120 to -80 dBm Aerial Connector Serial Ports RS232 Port Reverse SMA Coaxial DB9 female DCE RS485 Port 2 pin terminal block 9600 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit 9600 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, Page 42 March 2000 Chapter Five Specifications Data transmission Protocol - serial

- radio Communications fail status Inputs and Outputs Digital Inputs Digital Outputs Digital Outputs Pulse Inputs On change-of-state

+ integrity update asynchronous ARQ, with 16 bit CRC synchronous ARQ Typical distance 1km Update time configurable Automatic acknowledgments with up to 4 retries May be mapped to local or remote output Resetting of outputs on comms fail configurable 905-1 Four 105-2 Four 105-3 None 105-1 Four 105-2 One 105-3 Eight 105-1 One 105-2 Four 105-3 None Opto-isolated (5000V)inputs, suitable for voltage free contacts or NPN transistor, contact wetting current 5mA, input debounce 0.5 second Relay output contacts, normally open, AC1 5A 250V AC3 2A 250V, 5A 120V DC1 5A 30V, 5A 20V DC3 2A 30V, 5A 20V FET output, 30 VDC 500mA max. Uses DI1. Max rate 100Hz, min. off-

time 5msec. Uses DI1-4. Max rate of DI1 is 1000Hz, min. off-time 0.5msec Max rate of DI2-4 is 100Hz, min. off-time 5msec. Pulse Output 105-1 One 105-2 None 105-3 Four FET output, 30 VDC 500mA max Max rate for 105-1 is100 Hz. Max rate for 105-3 is 1000 Hz. Pulse signal recreated, pulse avail. on analogue

(scaling configurable). Divide-by-10 available for 1000Hz inputs. output, rate Analogue Inputs 105-1 Two 4-20 mA 105-2 Six 0-20mA floating differential input, common mode voltage -0.5V to 27V. 24 VDC for powering external loops provided, 150 mA max. Resolution 15 bit, man_905_2.0.doc Page 43 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Analogue Input Setpoints 105-3 None 105-1 AI 1 only 105-2 AI 1-6 Analogue Outputs 105-1 Two 4-20mA 105-2 None 105-3 Eight 0-20mA Accuracy 10 bit, Digital filter time constant 1 second (config.) Configurable high & low set-points, allowing set/reset of remote digital outputs current sink to common, max loop voltage 27V, Resolution 15 bit Accuracy 10 bit (0.016mA) System Parameters Network Configurations Mapping User Configuration Diagnostics Communications via radio or RS485 or network of both Up to 95 radio units with up to 32 serial units off each radio unit Any input to any output in system Via on-board DIP switches or RS232 terminal or laptop On board diagnostics Automatic check on start-up Input status Via RS232 terminal or laptop Output test Incoming radio signal level Simple radio path testing Page 44 March 2000 Chapter Six Troubleshooting Chapter Six TROUBLESHOOTING 6.1 INDICATOR OK LED OFF OK LED ON PWR LED ON TX LED ON RX LED ON RX LED ON RX LED ON No transmission on change of state Diagnostics Chart CONDITION Continuously Continuously Continuously Flashes briefly Flashes briefly Flashes continuously Continuously MEANING Battery Voltage low CPU failure

+24V supply failure/overload Normal Operation Supply available from SUP1/SUP2 Supply available from solar panel Radio transmitting Radio Receiving Serial port communicating Module in Configuration Mode Test Button press in Configuration Mode Unit not configured correctly - re-

configure and check operation The green OK LED on the front panel indicates correct operation of the unit. This LED extinguishes on failure as described above. When the OK LED extinguishes shutdown state is indicated. In this state, all digital outputs turn OFF and the +24V supply turns off. On processor failure, or on failure during start-up diagnostics, the unit shuts down, and remains in shutdown until the fault is rectified. The unit also shuts down if the battery voltage falls below 10.8 volts. This is a protection feature designed to protect the battery from deep discharge in case of extended period without supply voltage. 6.2 Self Test Functions 6.2.1 Input to Output Reflection (105-1 only) The unit will require re-configuration after SELF TEST. Ensure you know the required operational configuration including system and unit addresses so that the network can be restored after testing. Remove the cover in the front panel, and set the DIP switches as shown below. Hold down the red button for five seconds, or until the Rx LED glows yellow, release the Red button (the Rx LED now flashes), then press and release the Red button (the flashing Rx LED extinguishes). man_905_2.0.doc Page 45 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Input signals may now be connected to the input terminals of the module. If the module is operating correctly, then the input signals will be reflected to the corresponding output on the same module. For example, if DI 1 is connected to common - i.e. the first digital input is turned "ON" - then DO 1 will activate, if the module is functional. Similarly, if a 12mA signal is connected to AI 2, then a 12mA signal should be able to be measured from AO 2, if the module is functioning correctly. If a module does not pass its self test function, then it should be returned to an authorised service agent for attention 6.2.2 Radio Testing using Tone Reversals This function allows the unit to be configured to continuously transmit a sequence of alternate zeros and ones on the radio. This function provides the facility to check VSWR of aerials during installation, as well as checking the fade margin of the path between two units (see below - received signal strength indication). The tone reversals function is initiated by setting all of the DIL switches to ON, and holding down the red button for approximately 5 seconds( until the RX LED lights continuously). On releasing the button, the RX LED will flash continuously, and the TX LED will light, indicating that the radio transmitter is on. 6.2.3 Diagnostics menu To aid in the checking and set-up of the 105 unit, a user friendly menu provides access to diagnostic functions in the 105. Use of the diagnostics menu does not affect module configuration. To access these diagnostics, a terminal must be connected to the serial port on the unit. The terminal may be a standalone terminal, or a personal computer running terminal emulation software. The terminal or terminal emulation software must be set-up for 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity. The menu is accessed by connecting a terminal to the serial (DB9 RS-232) port on the 105 (ensure the RS485 port is disconnected), setting all switches to 0, and holding down the red button for approximately 5 seconds, until the RX LED lights continuously. One of the following menus will be displayed on the terminal :

Page 46 March 2000 Chapter Six 105 V1.0 Ins a) Tones Comms DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 AO1 AO2 Switch Signal b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k)

1052 V1.0 Digital Inputs Analogue Inputs Tones Comms DO1 Switch Signal a) b) c) d) e) f) g)

Troubleshooting 1053 V1.0 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) l) m) n) o) p) q) r) s) t) u)

Ins Tones Comms DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 DO8 AO1 AO2 AO3 AO4 AO5 AO6 AO7 AO8 Switch Signal Choose an item from the menu by entering the letter before that item. For example, to select the

"Comms" function from the 105-2 Menu, enter :- d Inputs This option provides a dynamic display of the status of all of the inputs in the 105, both internal and external. 105-1 Modules 1234MLS 0101001 P CNT 00F6 AI1 C000 AI2 4000 P RATE VBATT 8000 9C00 The first 7 values (1234MLS) each represent a single digital input. A 1 indicates that that input is ON, and a 0 indicates that the corresponding input is OFF. "1234" represents the four physical digital inputs, DI1 to DI4. "M" is the mains fail status (1 for mains fail, 0 for mains OK). "L" is the battery low volts status (1 for low volts 0 for OK). "S" is the set-point status. P CNT, AI1, AI2, P RATE, and VBATT each represent 16 bit values, displayed as four hexadecimal digits. P CNT is the current value of the pulsed input counter. This value should increment each time DI 1 turns from OFF to ON. P RATE displays the current pulse rate at DI1. This value is scaled according to the MAXRATE value configured (0 Hertz is displayed as 4000, and the maximum rate is displayed as C000). man_905_2.0.doc Page 47 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual AI1 and AI2 represent the value for the two analogue inputs. Full scale input (20 mA) is displayed as C000, 4mA is displayed as 4000, and 0ma is displayed as 2000. Analogue inputs are filtered digitally with a time constant of 1 second, so a sudden change in the analogue input current will result in a slower change in displayed analogue value, finally settling at the new value. A guide to translate the displayed value to the analogue input current is provided below. Add together the figures corresponding to each digit in each position to determine e.g. displayed value 3456 = 2.000+0.500+0.039+0.003 the current (mA)

= 2.542mA Digit Leftmost position Next position Next position Rightmost 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

0.000 2.000 4.000 6.000 8.000 10.000 12.000 14.000 16.000 18.000 20 22

0.000 0.125 0.250 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 0.875 1.000 1.125 1.250 1.375 1.500 1.625 1.750 1.875 0.000 0.008 0.016 0.023 0.031 0.039 0.047 0.055 0.063 0.070 0.078 0.086 0.094 0.102 0.109 0.117 position 0.000 0.000 0.001 0.001 0.002 0.002 0.003 0.003 0.004 0.004 0.005 0.005 0.006 0.006 0.007 0.007 VBATT is the current internally derived battery voltage. 4000 corresponds to 8 Volts, C000 represents 16 volts. A quicker method is use the calculation :

Battery voltage (volts) = I + 6, where I is the mA value determined from the above table using VBATT. For example, a value of VBATT of A000 gives an I value of 16mA from the above table. The battery voltage corresponding to this is 14V (or x 16 + 6). 105-2 Modules Digital Inputs DIN SETPNT PULSED 1234MSL123456 0000100111111 PIN1 0000 PIN2 0000 PIN3 0000 PIN4 0000 Page 48 March 2000 Chapter Six Troubleshooting AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6 0D3A 0CD2 0CC7 0CC7 0CD4 0CC7 Analogue Inputs VBAT PR1 PR2 PR3 8138 4000 105-3 Modules 4000 4000 PR4 4000 ML VBAT VSLR 00 9FA2 0000 Tones This provides the same function as described above in 6.2.2. Tone Reversals. This function may be used in conjunction with the Signal option (described below) to check the path between two 105 units. Comms This function allows monitoring of all messages transmitted and received over the radio. Transmitted messages are displayed starting in the leftmost column of the display. Received messages are displayed indented by one space. Received messages which have been corrupted are displayed with a '*' in the first column of the display. The first four hexadecimal digits are the system address attached to the message, and must match for units to communicate successfully. Example (105-1):

>c Comms 01FA8106008005C672D4F1

*01FA8186C6B5A7 01FA8106008005C672D4F1 01FA818600B5A7

*01FB86010080010000FEC2 01FA86010080010000FEC2 01FA868100332F DO1 to DO8 Command message transmitted by this unit. Corrupt Acknowledge received from remote. Message re-transmitted by this unit. (no Ack) Valid Acknowledge received from remote. Corrupt message received from remote unit. Re-sent message received from remote unit. Acknowledge message from this unit to remote. These options allow the user to set and clear digital outputs. To set an output, select the corresponding menu item, at the prompt, type the value FFFF to turn the output ON, or 0000 to turn the output OFF. For example, to set DO1 ON,

>e DO1

>FFFF man_905_2.0.doc Page 49 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual AO1 to AO8 These options allow the user to set analogue outputs to any value. To set the output, select the corresponding menu item. At the prompt type the value required for the analogue output as a four digit hexadecimal value. Refer to the table above for analogue current/expected value relationship. To set AO2 on 105-3 to 19 mA :

>m AO2

>B800 Switch This option allows testing of the DIL (Dual In Line) switches used for the configuration of the module. The diagram below indicates the layout of the switches of which there are two sets of eight, with an Enter button located to the right of the pair. the display indicates the current switch settings with the digit 1 corresponding to On and the digit O corresponding to Off. Changing the switch settings in this mode will change the display. Test each switch and check to ensure the display changes accordingly. When the Enter button is pressed, regardless of the previous switch setting, switches 1, 5, 9 and 13 will display as a 1 O X Switches 1 or 0 Button Not Pressed =

Pressed =

Switches 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Displayed 1110001001010101 O X 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1110101011011101

1 5 9 13

Signal This option provides for testing the radio path between two 105-U units for a suitable fade margin. Although a pair of units may communicate successfully, radio communication may be affected by a Page 50 March 2000

Chapter Six Troubleshooting range of influences, including atmospheric conditions, changing landscape, degradation of aerials or co-axial cable, low battery voltage etc. Fade margin is an indication of how far a radio path can deteriorate before communication becomes unreliable. When using the Signal feature, a meter is displayed with a mark indicating the current received radio signal level. To check the radio path between two units, select the signal option at the local unit. The remote unit may then be set up for tone reversals (refer 1 above) and the signal level read from the meter. A simpler method when remote units are not easily accessible is to cause a transmission from the local unit to the remote unit (by setting a digital input which maps to the remote unit, for example). The meter will latch the received signal from the remote unit for half a second, allowing the received level to be read. Under normal radio conditions, a reading of 0 indicates a very marginal communication path. For reliable communications, the signal reading should be 3 or above. Minimum signal level for reliable comms

>k Signal 0123456789----

In areas experiencing radio interference or high background noise, reliable communications may not be achievable even with this signal level. To determine if interference is occurring the signal option may be selected without any other 105 units active. In a normal radio environment, no reading should be displayed. If a reading is displayed, then the received signal strength from the remote should be at least three counts higher than the background noise for reliable communication. Displayed signal level of background noise/interference Minimum signal level for reliable comms

>k Signal 0123456789----

>k Signal 0123456789----

When using directional aerials (i.e. YAGI aerials) this feature may be used to peak the received signal level. Set-up the remote unit to transmit tone reversals as described above, and observe the signal indication while adjusting the orientation of the aerial. A peak in signal level indicates optimum orientation of the aerial. man_905_2.0.doc Page 51 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Chapter Seven WARRANTY & SERVICE We are pleased that you have purchased this product. Your purchase is guaranteed against defects for a 365 day warranty period, commencing from the date of purchase. This warranty does not extend to:

Failures caused by the operation of the equipment outside the particular product's specification. use of the 105 module not in accordance with this User Manual, or abuse, misuse, neglect or damage by external causes, or repairs, alterations, or modifications undertaken other than by an authorised Service Agent. Full product specifications and maintenance instructions are available from your Service Agent, your source of purchase, or from the master distributor in your country upon request and should be noted if you are in any doubt about the operating environment for your equipment purchase In the unlikely event of your purchase being faulty, your warranty extends to free repair or replacement of the faulty unit, after its receipt at the master distributor in your country. Our warranty does not include transport or insurance charges relating to a warranty claim. This warranty does not indemnify the purchaser of products for any consequential claim for damages or loss of operations or profits. Should you wish to make a warranty claim, or obtain service, please forward the module to the nearest authorised Service Agent along with proof of purchase. For details of authorised Service Agents, contact your sales distributor. Page 52 March 2000 Appendix A System Example Appendix A SYSTEM EXAMPLE The following example of a system is a comprehensive guide to using some of the features of the 105 range and design of 105 system. The example application is a pump station which supplies water from a reservoir to a tank station. Signals are transferred between the pump station and tank station by radio - the distance between the two stations is 1.5 km (1 mile), and the radio path is heavily obstructed by buildings and trees. A control station is located near the pump station, and there is an existing signal cable between the control station and the pump station. A 105U-1 module is installed at the pump station (with address 1) and a 105U-2 module is installed at the tank station (with address 2). Because the signal cable to the control station does not have enough cores for all of the signals required, the signal cable is used as a RS485 cable and a 105S-3 module is installed at the control station (with address 96). As this module has an address greater than 95, the 105U-1 at the pump station will communicate to it via its serial port. The following diagram represents the system :-

man_905_2.0.doc Page 53 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual The following design points should be noted :-

A test of the radio path between the pump station and the tank station indicated that the radio path would be reliable provided aerials were installed at 6 m above the ground. At each site, the coaxial cable would be approx 10 m in length, so it was decided to use 3 element Yagi aerials with RG58 coaxial cable - the Yagi aerials would compensate for the loss in the cable. The system was installed in a country which permitted the use of 500mW radio power. If this had not been the case, then an intermediate repeater station would have been required. At the tank station, there was an existing light pole with a mains power supply - the light pole was 10m high. Permission was obtained to mount the aerial from the pole and to use the power supply for the radio telemetry module. As there was no existing electrical panel at this station, a small steel enclosure was installed on the light pole. A 2 Amp-Hour sealed battery was installed to provide power during any mains failure. The flow and level transducer were powered from the 24VDC loop supply provided by the 105 module. At the pump station, the aerial was mounted on a 3 m J-bracket installed on the roof of the pump station building. The final height of the aerial was approx 6 m. Care was taken to align the Yagi aerials so they pointed at each other. The Yagi aerials were installed with horizontal polarity

- that is, with the elements horizontal. These aerials will not "hear" other radio users on the same radio channel which generally use vertical polarity. There was an existing electrical enclosure at the pump station, and the 105U module was installed inside this enclosure. The module was powered from 220VAC mains with a 2 Amp Hour sealed battery as backup. At the control station, the 105S module was installed inside the existing control panel enclosure. The module was powered from an existing 24VDC power supply. Page 54 March 2000 Appendix A System Example Tank Station Configuration The 105U-2 module has the following configuration :-

Note the following points in the configuration :

The configuration software used was CFG105-2.EXE as the module is a 105U-2. The system address is 10587 (a random selection) and unit address is 2. PIN1 (the flow meter) is mapped to Out3 (D/P output 3) at #96 which is the control station -

#1 is a repeater. The pulse rate for this PIN (PLSR1) is mapped to Out2 at #97 via #1. This is AO2 of the 105S-3 at the control station. Remember that the 105S-3 has two addresses - the lower address is used for the digital outputs, and the higher address is used for the analogue outputs. man_905_2.0.doc Page 55 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual The pulse rate scaling for PIN1 has been set to 5 Hz to match the maximum flow rate of the flow meter. Note that PIN1 has not been configured for "divide by 10" (for 1000 Hz pulse signals). AIN1 (the level transducer) is mapped to Out1 at #97 via #1. The analogue debounce has been set to 2 sec. This is to avoid any wave action on the surface of the tank causing un-necessary change transmissions. This debounce time will also operate on the PLSR1 value, but as the flow rate changes slowly, this will not affect the performance of this signal. SETPT1 (the set-point status for AI1) is mapped to Out2 (DO2) of #1 (pump station). The set-

point values for SETPT1 have been set to 40% and 75%. When the tank level drops to 40%, DO2 at the pump station will activate to start the pump. When the level rises above 75%, DO2 will reset to stop the pump. The update time for SETPT1 has been changed to 5 minute, as required. An additional mapping has been entered - LOW VOLT has been mapped to Out7 at #96 via

#1 (DO7 at the control station). This mapping is for future use - it will provide a low battery voltage alarm for the tank station. The update time for this mapping has been set to the maximum time of 15 minutes to reduce loading of the radio channel. A Start-up poll has been configured for #1, as DO1 at the tank station is controlled from the pump station. Note that no comms fail reset time has been configured for DO1. As this output drives an indication only, the indication will show the last correct status even during communication failures. Pump Station Configuration The 105U-1 module has the following configuration :-

Page 56 March 2000 Appendix A System Example Note the following points in the configuration :

The configuration software used was CFG105-1.EXE as the module is a 105U-1. The system address is 10587 (same as before) and unit address is 1. DIN1 (pump fault signal) is mapped to Out1 (DO1) at #96 which is the control station. Note that no repeater address is necessary as there is a direct link between #1 and #96. DIN2 (pump running signal) has two mappings - a mapping to DO1 at #2 (tank station) and DO2 at #96 (control station). When DIN2 changes, there will be two separate change messages transmitted - one by radio to #2 and one by serial link to #96. AIN1 (pump amps) is mapped to Out3 at #97 (AO3 at control station). An additional mapping has been entered - LOW VOLT has been mapped to Out8 at #96

(DO8 at the control station). This mapping is for future use - it will provide a low battery voltage alarm for the pump station. A Start-up poll has been configured for #2, as DO2 at the pump station is controlled from the tank station. Note that a comms fail reset time of 11 minutes has been configured for DO2. This means that if a message has not been received for DO2 within 11 minutes, DO2 will reset and switch off the pump. The 11 min time was chosen as it means that two successive update messages have to be missed before the pump is reset, and there is no problems if the pump runs for 11 minutes during a system failure (the tank will not overflow during this time). man_905_2.0.doc Page 57 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Control Station Configuration The 105S-3 module has the following configuration :-

Note the following points in the configuration :

The configuration software used was CFG105-3.EXE as the module is a 105S-3. The system address is 10587 (same as before) and unit address is 96. As the module is a 105-3 module, it will automatically assume addresses #96 and #97. The only mappings are Start-up polls. Note that there are two separate polls, one for each remote module. D/P Out 3 has been configured as a PO. Its pulse output update time is the same as the PI update time at the remote module (both have been left at their default value of 1 minute). Comms fail reset times have been selected for the analogue outputs (21 minutes) but not the Page 58 March 2000 Appendix A System Example digital outputs. In the event of a system failure, the digital outputs will stay at their last correct status, but the analogue outputs will reset to 0 mA. System Failure Alarm After the system had been running for some time, the operators wanted a "system failure" output at the control station, to warn the operators that there was a fault with the system. The following configuration was added :

At #2 (tank station), NOT DI4 Out4 at 96 via 1 ; DI4 Update time = 1 minute At #96 (control station), DO4 Comms fail reset time = 3.5 min At the control station, DO4 was a "system OK" signal. It was normally active - if the signal reset, then this represented a system failure. At the tank station, there is no signal wired to DI4. By mapping NOT DI4 to DO4 at the control station, a message is transmitted every minute to this output to activate it. The message is transmitted via the radio link to #1, and then by the serial link to #96. If anything happened to either module #2 or module #1, or the radio link, or the serial link, then the update messages for DO4 will not be received at the control station module. After 3.5 Minutes, DO4 will reset indicating a problem. The time of 3.5 minutes was selected as this means that 3 successive update messages have to be missed before a system alarm occurs. Also note, that if module #96 fails, DO4 will reset and give an alarm signal. man_905_2.0.doc Page 59

905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual Thank you for your selection of the 905U-D radio modem. We trust it will give you many years of valuable service. ATTENTION!

Incorrect termination of supply wires may cause internal damage and will void warranty. To ensure your 905U-D enjoys a long life, double check ALL your connections with the users manual before turning the power on. Page 2 May 2000 Contents FCC Notice:

This users manual is for the ELPRO 905U-D radio modem. This device complies with Part 15.247 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) 2) This device may not cause harmful interference and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device must be operated as supplied by ELPRO Technologies Pty Ltd. Any changes or modifications made to the device without the written consent of ELPRO Technologies Pty. Ltd. May void the users authority to operate the device. End user products that have this device embedded must be supplied with non-standard antenna connectors, and antennas available from vendors specified by ELPRO Technologies. Please contact ELPRO Technologies for end user antenna and connector recommendations. Notices:

Safety:

Exposure to RF energy is an important safety consideration. The FCC has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC regulated equipment as a result of its actions in General Docket 79-144 on March 13, 1996. CAUTION:

To comply with FCC RF Exposure requirements in section 1.1310 of the FCC Rules, antennas used with this device must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons to satisfy RF exposure compliance. DO NOT:

operate the transmitter when someone is within 20 cm of the antenna operate the transmitter unless all RF connectors are secure and any open connectors are properly terminated. operate the equipment near electical blasting caps or in an explosive atmosphere All equipment must be properly grounded for safe operations. All equipment should be serviced only by a qualified technician. Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 3 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual How to Use This Manual To receive the maximum benefit from your 905U-D product, please read the Introduction, Installation and Operation chapters of this manual thoroughly before putting the 905U-D to work. Chapter Four Configuration details the configurations available and explains the diverse operation of the product in detail. Chapter Five Specifications details the features of the product and lists the standards to which the product is approved. Chapter Six Troubleshooting will help if your system has problems and Chapter Seven specifies the Warranty and Service conditions. The foldout sheet 905U-D Installation Guide is an installation drawing appropriate for most applications. Page 4 May 2000 Contents WARNING 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. In some countries, a radio licence is not required for the 905U-D telemetry modules provided the module is installed using the aerial and equipment configuration described in the 905U-D Installation Guide. In other countries, refer to the relevant Regulatory Authority. Check the Installation Guide for your country listing. Where a radio licence is not required, operation is authorised by the relevant Authority in your country on a non-protection basis. Although all care is taken in the design of these units, there is no responsibility taken for sources of external interference. Some delay in the operation of the module may occur during periods of interference. Systems should be designed to be tolerant of these delays. To avoid the risk of electrocution, the aerial, aerial cable, and all terminals of the 905U-D module should be electrically protected. To provide maximum surge and lightning protection, the module should be connected to a suitable earth and the aerial, aerial cable, and the module should be installed as recommended in the Installation Guide. To avoid accidents during maintenance or adjustment of remotely controlled equipment, all equipment should be first disconnected from the 905U-D module during these adjustments. Equipment should carry clear markings to indicate remote or automatic operation. eg. "This equipment is remotely controlled and may start without warning. Isolate at the switchboard before attempting adjustments."

The 905U-D module is not suitable for use in explosive environments without additional protection. Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 5 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual CONTENTS CHAPTER ONE INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................... 8 1.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 8 TRANSPARENT MODE ....................................................................................................... 9 1.2 CONTROLLED MODE ...................................................................................................... 10 1.3 1.4 REPEATER UNITS ........................................................................................................... 11 CHAPTER TWO INSTALLATION.......................................................................................... 12 2.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 12 AERIAL INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................... 12 2.2 2.2.1 Dipole aerial...................................................................................................... 13 2.2.2 Three element Yagi aerial................................................................................. 13 2.2.3 Collinear (3dB) aerial........................................................................................ 14 POWER SUPPLY............................................................................................................. 15 SERIAL CONNECTIONS ................................................................................................... 15 2.4.1 RS232 Serial Port............................................................................................. 15 2.4.2 RS485 Serial Port............................................................................................. 16 COMMUNICATIONS OK (DCD) OUTPUT.......................................................................... 17 2.3 2.4 2.5 CHAPTER THREE OPERATION .......................................................................................... 18 POWER-UP AND NORMAL OPERATION ............................................................................. 18 3.1 3.2 SERIAL AND RADIO DATA................................................................................................ 19 3.2.1 Character Type................................................................................................. 19 3.2.2 Serial Data Rate ............................................................................................... 19 3.2.3 Radio Data Rate............................................................................................... 20 TRANSPARENT MODE ..................................................................................................... 21 3.3 3.4 CONTROLLED MODE ...................................................................................................... 21 3.5 WHAT OPERATING MODE TO USE ?................................................................................. 25 OPERATING PROBLEMS .................................................................................................. 26 3.6 CHAPTER FOUR CONFIGURATION ................................................................................... 28 4.1 BEFORE CONFIGURING .................................................................................................. 28 CONFIGURATION MODE .................................................................................................. 28 4.2 4.3 HAYES COMMANDS......................................................................................................... 28 4.3.1 Unit Reset......................................................................................................... 29 4.3.2 Storing Configuration Parameters - Write Registers....................................... 29 4.3.3 Default Values - Restore Factory Defaults ...................................................... 29 4.3.4 S-Registers ...................................................................................................... 29 4.3.5 Changing Destination/Repeater Address - autodial....................................... 33 4.3.6 Connecting to a Remote Module single dial................................................. 34 4.3.7 Reading Configuration Parameters.................................................................. 34 4.3.8 Unit Test commands - AT&Tx........................................................................ 34 Page 6 May 2000 Contents 4.3.9 Version Information - ATI............................................................................... 34 4.3.10 Character Type - AT&Bx ................................................................................. 35 4.3.11 Character Type - AT&Mx................................................................................. 35 4.3.12 Verbose mode control, Local Echo control, and Quiet mode.......................... 35 4.3.13 Responses ....................................................................................................... 35 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES............................................................................................ 36 4.4 CHAPTER FIVE SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................... 39 CHAPTER SIX TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................................. 41 DIAGNOSTICS CHART ..................................................................................................... 41 6.1 6.2 TEST FUNCTIONS........................................................................................................... 41 6.2.1 Radio Testing using Tone Reversals ............................................................... 41 6.2.2 Diagnostic Functions - AT&Tx ....................................................................... 42 6.2.3 Bit Error Rate Test (BER) ................................................................................ 44 CHAPTER SEVEN WARRANTY & SERVICE ....................................................................... 45 1.1 APPENDIX A SWITCH CONFIGURATION .......................................................................... 46 1.0 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................... 46 1.0.1 Default Configuration........................................................................................ 47 1.0.2 Transparent Mode ............................................................................................ 47 1.0.3 Controlled Mode................................................................................................ 47 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS....................................................................................... 51 1.1.1 Operating Mode................................................................................................ 52 1.1.2 Tail Time........................................................................................................... 52 1.1.3 Message Length............................................................................................... 52 1.1.4 Serial Data Rate ............................................................................................... 53 1.1.5 Radio Data Rate............................................................................................... 53 1.1.6 Transmit Hold-off Time..................................................................................... 53 1.1.7 Receive Hold-off Time...................................................................................... 54 1.1.8 Character Type................................................................................................. 54 1.1.9 Connect Update Time ...................................................................................... 55 1.1.10 Reset to Factory Default Settings .................................................................... 55 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE.............................................................................................. 55 1.2 APPENDIX B DECIMAL TO BINARY TABLE....................................................................... 58 Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 7 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual Chapter One INTRODUCTION 1.1 General The 905U-D radio modem module has been designed to provide flexible and reliable radio modem functions, at an economical price. Radio modems transmit serial data over a long distance via radio. The serial data is not changed - the output data is the same as the input data. Although the 905U-D is intended to be simple in its application, it also provides many sophisticated features. This manual should be read carefully to ensure that the modules are configured and installed to give reliable performance. Each 905U-D module will connect to a host device by RS232 or RS485 serial connection. Examples of host devices are PLCs, data loggers, intelligent transducers and computers. The 905U-D unit can receive data from the host device and transmit this data by radio to another (or several) 905U-D module. The other module will recreate the serial data and output it as either a RS232 or RS485 serial signal. The 905U-D unit provides two-way communications - each module can accept serial data and also output serial data. The 905U-D module includes power supply, microprocessor controller, serial input/output circuits and a UHF radio transceiver - no external electronics are required. The 905U-D radio frequency has been selected to meet the requirements of unlicensed operation for remote monitoring and control of equipment. That is, a radio licence is not required for the 905U-D modules in many countries. See Chapter Five Specifications for details. The units are configured from a terminal using Hayes commands or by using switches under the plastic cover on the front of the unit. RS232 is an electrical standard format for a full duplex point-to-point serial connection. RS485 is an electrical standard format for a half-duplex multidrop serial connection. Up to 32 devices can communicate on a common RS485 serial bus. Each 905U-D unit can only connect to one serial signal -

either RS232 or RS485. However different modules in the same system can connect to different types of serial signals. For example, RS232 data from one host device can be transmitted to a remote 905U-D unit and output as RS485 data to another host device. The 905U-D has been designed to be flexible enough to cover a wide range of applications. The user is able to configure many different parameters such that the 905U-D unit will connect reliably to different types of host devices. Before the radio modem can be used, these parameters must be configured. Some of these parameters are :-

Character type - the 905U-D will accept a variety of 7 or 8 data bit characters Serial Data Rate - between 75 and 38400 bits/sec Radio Data Rate - between 1200 and 9600 bits/sec Operating mode - transparent mode or controlled mode . The operation of the 905U-D radio modem is relatively simple. As data is received at the serial port, the data is transmitted on the radio channel. Up to 520 bytes of data can be Page 8 May 2000 Chapter One Introduction transmitted in one transmission. The radio transmission commences when the first data byte is received, and ends when there are no more data bytes in the input buffer, or when the number of bytes transmitted equals the maximum message length (user configurable - default 520 bytes). If more than 520 bytes is input, the 905U-D unit will transmit the first 520 bytes, then the next 520 bytes, and so on until all of the data has been transmitted. Because the radio data rate could be less than the input serial data rate, an input memory buffer of 8Kbytes is provided. The RS232 connection provides CTS control to prevent the buffer overflowing. There are no data flow control signals for RS485. A radio channel cannot provide as secure a data channel as a wired connection. The 905U-

D uses a UHF radio channel with a very low level of natural or industrial noise, however there is a chance of interference from other users of the unlicensed radio channel. We recommend that the flow of data over the radio channel is controlled by using error detection and handshaking - that is, returning an acknowledgment transmission if a data packet is received on the radio channel without error. This function can be performed by either the host devices or the 905U-D modules. The modules may be configured by the user to operate in one of two modes. In transparent mode, it is assumed that the host devices control the flow of data. In controlled mode, the 905U-D units control the flow of data. 1.2 Transparent Mode The default configuration of the 905U-D modem is transparent mode - the modules are set in this mode at the factory. In transparent mode, there is no control of the data transmissions. Input data is simply transmitted by radio and every other 905U-D unit in that system which receives the transmission will output the data. This mode relies on the host devices to perform the handshaking function, and re-transmitting serial data if the data is corrupted (no handshake). It also relies on the host devices to include any addressing necessary in the data. In this mode, modules are not configured with a unit address. Data is broadcast - every other 905U-D in the system will receive the data and output the data to their individual host devices. The user may configure the 905U-D modems to add error checking to each data packet transmitted - if error checking is configured, data will not be output if it is received without a correct error-check. This feature provides additional protection against corruption of the data during the radio transmission. If error-checking is not configured, then the data received by radio will be output without checking for errors. Transparent mode is suitable for a host device which is able to communicate on a multi-drop bus type network. An example of an application is the use of radio modems to extend a PLC RS485 network. The serial messages from the PLCs already include PLC addressing and error detection/correction to control the flow of data. Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 9 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual 1.3 Controlled Mode radio. transmitted by In controlled mode, the flow of data is controlled by the 905U-D units. Each 905U-D unit is configured with an address by the user, and a destination address for the data to be transmitted to. Data is transmitted addressed to the destination module, and only this module will output the serial data. The source module will add an error-check (16 bit CRC) to the data The destination module will process the error-

check, and if correct, it will transmit an acknowledgment message (ACK) back to the source module. If the error-check is not correct, then the destination module will transmit a fail message (NACK) back to the source module. If the source module receives a NACK return, or does not receive any return within 1 second, it will re-transmit the data. The source module will attempt to transmit the data up to five times, until an acknowledgment (ACK) is received. If an acknowledgment is still not received, then a communications failure output will be activated, and the source module will not accept any more input data from its host device. An example of an application using controlled mode would be a radio modem link between an intelligent gas analyser and a monitoring computer system. Intelligent transducers do not normally provide addressing or error checking functions - these would be provided by the 905U-D modules. In controlled mode, the destination address may be set by the host device by initially sending a Hayes command to the 905U-D module, or by on-board miniature switches. Hayes commands are a standard set of commands used with conventional telephone modems. An example of an application that would use Hayes command to set destination addresses would be a central computer polling data loggers for periodic information. Page 10 May 2000 Introduction Repeater Units Chapter One 1.4 A 905U-D unit may be used as a repeater to re-

transmit radio messages. The purpose of a repeater unit is to extend radio range. In transparent mode, only one module per system may be used as a repeater. If more than one module is configured as a repeater, any message transmitted in the system will be continually re-transmitted between the repeater units. The repeater in transparent mode will repeat every transmission it receives. In controlled mode, up to five repeaters may be configured for any transmission path. Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 11 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual Chapter Two INSTALLATION 2.1 General The 905U-D module is housed in an rugged aluminium case, suitable for DIN-rail mounting. Terminals will accept wires up to 2.5 sqmm in size. Normal 110-240V mains supply should not be connected to any terminal of the 905U-D module. Refer to Section 2.3 Power Supply. Before installing a new system, it is preferable to bench test the complete system. Configuration problems are easier to recognise when the system units are adjacent. Following installation, the most common problem is poor communications caused by incorrectly installed aerials, or radio interference on the same channel, or the radio path being inadequate. If the radio path is a problem (ie path too long, or obstructions in the way), then higher performance aerials or a higher mounting point for the aerial may rectify the problem. Alternately, use an intermediate 905U-D Module as a repeater. The foldout sheet 905U-D Installation Guide provides an installation drawing appropriate to most applications. Further information is detailed below. Each 905U-D module should be effectively earthed via the "GND" terminal on the 905U-D module - this is to ensure that the surge protection circuits inside the 905U-D module are effective. 2.2 Aerial Installation The 905U-D module will operate reliably over large distances. The distance which may be reliably achieved will vary with each application - depending on the type and location of aerials, the degree of radio interference, and obstructions (such as hills or trees) to the radio path. See the 905U-D Installation Guide for expected ranges in your country. Note that the expected range is for radio data rates of up to 4800 bits/sec. If 9600 bit/sec rate is configured, the transmitted data will not have the same range. The radio range for 9600 bit/sec rate will be approx 70% of the range at lower data rates. Where it is not possible to achieve reliable communications between two 905U-D modules, then a third 905U-D module may be used to receive the message and re-transmit it. This module is referred to as a repeater. An aerial must be connected to each 905U-D module using the BNC female connector at the top of the module. To achieve the maximum transmission distance, the aerials should be raised above intermediate obstructions such that the radio path is true line of sight. Because of the curvature of the earth, the aerials will need to be elevated at least 5 metres above ground for paths greater than 5 km (3 miles). For short distances, the modules will operate reliably with some obstruction of the radio path. Obstructions which are close to either aerial will have more of a blocking effect than obstructions in the middle of the radio path. For example, a group of trees around the aerial is a large obstruction, and the aerial should be raised above the trees. However if there is at least 100 metres of clear path before a group of trees, the trees will have little affect on the radio path. Page 12 May 2000 Chapter Two Installation An aerial should be connected to the module via 50 ohm coaxial cable (eg RG58 or RG213) terminated with a male BNC connector. The higher the aerial is mounted, the greater the transmission range will be, however as the length of coaxial cable increases so do cable losses. For use on unlicensed frequency channels, there are several types of aerials suitable for use. It is important aerials are chosen carefully to avoid contravening the maximum power limit on the unlicensed channel - if in doubt refer to an authorised service provider. Connections between the aerial and coaxial cable should be carefully taped to prevent ingress of moisture. Moisture ingress in the coaxial cable is a common cause for problems with radio systems, as it greatly increases the radio losses. We recommend that the connection be taped with a layer of PVC insulating tape, then a layer of vulcanising tape such as 3M 23 tape, with a final layer of PVC insulating tape. Where aerials are mounted on elevated masts, the masts should be effectively earthed to avoid lightning surges. Although the 905U-D module is fitted with surge protection, additional surge suppression devices are recommended if lightning surge problems are experienced. If the aerial is not already shielded from lightning strike by an adjacent earthed structure, a lightning rod may be installed above the aerial to provide shielding. 2.2.1 Dipole aerial. A unity gain dipole is the normal aerial for use on unlicensed channels. As it does not provide any gain, then the power transmitted from the aerial will be the same as the power out of the module, and hence will not exceed the permitted power of the unlicensed channel. For marginal radio paths, the following lengths are the recommended maximum for the coaxial cable to the dipole aerial. RG58 10 metres RG213 20 metres. Note that this applies to marginal paths only - if the radio path has a strong radio signal, then longer lengths of cable ( and hence more cable loss) can be tolerated. If more than 20 metres of cable is required for a marginal path installation, then a low loss cable such as RG9913 should be used. Alternatively, a higher gain aerial may be used to compensate for losses. Dipole aerials should be mounted vertically, at least 1 metre away from a wall or mast. 2.2.2 Three element Yagi aerial. A 3 element Yagi aerial provides approx 4 dB of gain. This may be used to compensate for coaxial cable loss for installations with marginal radio path. Note that these aerials should not be used if the coaxial cable lengths are less than the following minimum lengths, otherwise the power transmitted from the aerial will exceed the power permitted for the unlicensed channel. RG58 RG213 10 metres 20 metres. Yagi aerials are directional. That is, they have positive gain to the front of the aerial, but negative gain in other directions. Hence Yagi aerials should be installed with the central beam horizontal and must be pointed exactly in the direction of transmission to benefit from the gain of the aerial. Also note that Yagi aerials normally have a drain hole on the folded element - the drain hole should be located on the bottom of the installed aerial. Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 13 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual The Yagi aerials may be installed with the elements in a vertical plane (vertically polarised) or in a horizontal plane (horizontally polarised). For a two station installation, with both modules using Yagi aerials, horizontal polarisation is recommended. If there are more than two stations transmitting to a common station, then the Yagi aerials should have vertical polarisation, and the common (or central) station should have a dipole or collinear aerial. Yagi aerials should not be used where a module is receiving messages from more than one other module such as repeater of base-station situations. An omni-directional aerials such as a dipole or a collinear aerial should be used. 2.2.3 Collinear (3dB) aerial. A 3dB collinear aerial may be used in the same way as a 3 element Yagi to compensate for the losses in long lengths of coaxial cable. This type of aerial is generally used at a central site with more than one remote site. The collinear aerial looks similar to the dipole, except that it is longer. Page 14 May 2000 Chapter Two 2.3 Installation Power Supply The 905U-D module may be powered by either a 12VDC or a 24VDC supply. The negative side of the supply is connected to "COM" and may be connected to ground. The supply negative is connected to the GND terminal internally. The positive side of the supply must not be connected to earth. The DC supply may be a floating supply or negatively grounded. The 12V supply is suitable for an unregulated DC supply. Where battery backup is required, a 12V battery charger may be used to supply the 905U-D module as well as charging the battery. The power requirements of the 905U-D units is 155mA at 12VDC or 100mA at 24VDC. The supply is protected by an internal 1A fuse, accessible at the bottom of the unit. 2.4 Serial Connections 2.4.1 RS232 Serial Port The serial port is a 9 pin DB9 female and provides for connection to a host device as well as a PC terminal for configuration, field testing and for factory testing. This port is internally shared with the RS485 - ensure that the RS485 is disconnected before attempting to use the RS232 port. Communication is via standard RS232 signals. The 905U-D is configured as DCE equipment with the pinout detailed below. Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 15 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual DB9 Connector Pinout Pin Name Direction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DCD Out Out In In Out In Out RD TD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI Function Data carrier detect - not connected Rev. 1.03 software & earlier Rev. 1.04 & later - driven when link is established in controlled mode

- driven always in transparent mode Transmit Data - Serial Data Output Receive Data - Serial Data Input Data Terminal Ready - not connected Rev 1.03 & earlier, Rev. 1.04 & later: When in controlled mode, will autodial if destination address is configured In control mode, an inactive DTR will force the 905U-

D to low-power mode. Rev. 1.11 & later: When in controlled mode, will autodial if destination address is configured In control mode, an inactive DTR will force the 905U-

D stop communicating by radio. If low power mode is selected, an inactive DTR will also force the 905U-D to low power mode. Signal Ground Data Set Ready - always high when unit is powered on. Request to Send - hardware flow control Clear to send - hardware flow control Ring indicator - not used or connected Hardware handshaking using the CTS/RTS lines is provided. The CTS/RTS lines may be used to reflect the status of the local units input buffer, or may be configured to reflect the status of CTS/RTS lines at the remote site. The 905U-D does not support XON/XOFF. Example cable drawings for connection to a DTE host (a PC) or another DCE host (or modem) are detailed below. These example are for transparent mode. Controlled mode may require the use of DTR or DCD signals. 2.4.2 RS485 Serial Port The RS485 port provides for communication between the 905U-D unit and its host device using a multi-drop cable. Up to 32 devices may be connected in each multi-drop network. Note that the RS485 port is shared internally with the RS232 port - make sure that the RS232 port is disconnected before using the RS485 port. Page 16 May 2000 Chapter Two Installation As the RS485 communication medium is shared, only one of the units in the system may send data at any one time. Thus communication protocols based on the RS-485 standard require some type of arbitration. The 905U-D holds off for three character times after receiving data from the RS-485 port before transmitting on the RS-485 port. RS485 is a balanced, differential standard but it is recommended that shielded, twisted pair cable be used to interconnect modules to reduce potential RFI. An RS485 network should be wired as indicated in the diagram below and terminated at each end of the network with a 120 ohm resistor. It is important to maintain the polarity of the two RS485 wires.

2.5 Communications OK (DCD) Output The 905U-D provides a digital output signal to indicate communications OK in controlled mode. The DCD (data carrier detect) output is on or active when a radio link has been established with the destination module. The output will reset (switch off) if a communications failure occurs. If the 905U-D unit does not receive an acknowledgment message after attempting to transmit a data packet five times, it will reset the DCD output. The output is a FET output to common, rated at 30VDC 500 mA. Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 17 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual Chapter Three OPERATION 3.1 Power-up and Normal Operation When power is initially connected to the 905U-D module, the module will perform internal diagnostics to check its functions. The following table details the status of the indicating LEDs on the front panel under normal operating conditions. LED Indicator Condition OK Radio RX Radio TX Serial RX On GREEN flash RED flash Flash GREEN flash RED flash Meaning Normal Operation Radio receiving data Weak radio signal Radio Transmitting Serial Port Receiving CTS low GREEN continuously Configuration Mode Serial TX GREEN flash Serial Port Transmitting DCD DCD On Off Transparent mode - always on Controlled mode communications link is established on when

Communications failure or link not established Other conditions indicating a fault are described in Chapter Six Troubleshooting. Low Power Operation The 905U-D may be forced to a low power condition where it switches off its receiver -

power consumption is reduced to approx 20% of normal. The low power condition will occur if the 905U-D is configured for controlled mode (modes 6 or 7), AND if an autodial address is configured, AND if the low power mode feature is configured in the character type selection, AND if the DTR signal is low or off. The use of this low power operation may be applicable in remote locations where there is a limited power supply such as solar panels. In this situation, the DTR signal from the host device is used to wake-up the 905U-D unit. The 905U-D unit will then operate normally until the DTR signal is reset by the host device. Page 18 May 2000 Chapter Three Operation 3.2 Serial and Radio Data Data input at the serial port is placed into the input buffer. This buffer will store 8Kbytes of data, and CTS control is provided on the RS232 port to prevent overflow. When the 905U-D unit detects data in the input buffer, it initiates a radio message. The radio message will end when the number of transmitted bytes reaches the maximum message length (configurable by the user). The message will also end if the input buffer becomes empty, however the radio transmitter will remain active for a delay time in case more bytes are input at the serial port. The delay time is called the tail time and is configurable by the user. 3.2.1 Character Type The 905U-D may be configured by the user to recognise the following types of characters. Data Bits Start Bits Stop Bits 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 Parity even odd none even odd none odd even none Most applications will require the character type to be the same at each 905U-D modem in the system. Nevertheless, the character type may be configured to be different at different 905U-D modems. Data is transmitted by radio as an eight-bit byte without stop or start bits. If the input data is 7 data bits without parity, then the byte transmitted by radio comprises the 7 bits plus a zero bit. If the input data is 7 data bits with parity, then the byte transmitted comprises the same byte. Input characters with 8 bits are transmitted as just the 8 data bits, with no parity. Because the data may be transmitted without parity, the user may configure CRC error checking to be added to each transmitted data packet. Data is output at the destination module based on the character type configured at that module - that is, the start/stop bits and parity is added to the radio data.3.2.2 Serial Data Rate The communications baud rates supported on both the RS232 serial port and the RS485 serial port are 50, 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, and 38400 baud - the user selects one of these rates during the configuration of the modem. Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 19 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual 3.2.3 Radio Data Rate The data is transmitted by radio as direct modulated synchronous data at a rate between 1200 and 9600 bits per second. The user must configure the radio data rate at each 905U-D module. The configured radio data rates must be the same for each module in a system. The 905U-D operates on a 12.5KHz radio channel. At 9600 bits/sec, a 905U-D unit cannot achieve the same reliable radio range as at 4800 bits/sec or less. The range at 9600 bits/sec is approx 70% of the normal range. On noisy radio channels, the range at 9600 baud will be less than 70% - as the noise level increases, the range difference between 4800 baud and 9600 baud increases. The radio message also includes the following :-

A 40 msec leading sequence of alternating 1s and 0s provides the receiving unit with time to capture and lock onto the incoming signal. A system address is superimposed on each message to provide discrimination between different 905U-D systems on the same radio channel. Each 905U-D unit in the same system must be configured with the same system address - refer Section 4, Configuration. Although other 905U-D modules will hear the radio transmissions, because they have a different system address, the radio transmission is ignored and no serial data is output. A frame flag appears once at the beginning of each message, and once at the end of each message. It indicates the start and end of a message packet. An idle flag may be used to allow the message to idle for a short period after each character is sent. This allows the 905U-D unit to effectively transfer data when the data rate arriving at the serial port is lower than the radio data transfer rate. After each character is sent, the transmission remains active waiting for the next character. This is controlled by the "tail time". The tail time may be configured for between 0 and 2.55 seconds - refer Section 4, Configuration. The RTS status of the source unit is included in the message. In controlled mode only, this is used to set the CTS signal at the destination module. In controlled mode, unit addressing is included. An error-check (16 bit CRC) may be configured by the user. Up to 520 bytes of data may be transmitted in a message - the maximum message size is configurable between 10 and 520 bytes. The data consists of a sequence of 8 bit bytes. Start, stop and parity bits are not transmitted, but they are re-generated at the receiving unit

(if configured). A transmit delay time and a receive delay time may also be configured. After each message is transmitted, a 905U-D unit will not transmit another message during the transmit delay time. After a message is received, a message will not be transmitted during the receive delay time. These parameters may be used to fine tune and give priority to different 905U-D units in a system. The default time of the transmit delay (70 msec) is selected for polling applications. If the host device sends more than one poll command, the second poll message will be delayed to allow a response to be received for the first poll message. The user can reduce this transmit delay time if it is not required. Page 20 May 2000 Chapter Three Operation 3.3 Transparent Mode In transparent mode, radio messages are transmitted without unit addressing. Units do not provide handshaking functions to control the flow of data. Every unit which receives the radio message, and has the correct system address, will output the data. Transparent mode operation is effectively a broadcast system. Data received at the serial port is transmitted out of the radio port. Data received from the radio is transmitted out of the serial port. Prior to transmitting, units will listen to the radio channel to ensure that it is clear - units will hold off from transmitting until the radio channel is clear. At the RS232 port, the CTS pin is high while there is space in the input data buffer. Host devices should provide a suitable protocol to ensure that error checking, handshaking and implementation of an appropriate re-transmission scheme is provided. This mode of operation is particularly suited to devices designed to operate over a multidrop network, such as PLC systems designed for operation over a RS-485 network. One 905U-D unit may be configured as a repeater. This unit will not output data at its serial ports. Any message received at the radio port, with the correct system address, will be re-

transmitted. The time taken to transmit a message is :-

lead-in system addr error check (if configured)

data 40msec 2 bytes 1.9ms per byte 2 bytes 4ms @ 4.8KB

@ 4.8KB 4ms @ 4.8KB If error checking is not configured at the receiving unit, data will start to be output approximately 1 msec after the system address has been received. If error checking is configured, data will be output approx 2msec after the end of the message. For example, a message with 20 bytes of data transmitted at 4800 bits/sec will be output approx 45msec after the data is input, if there is no error checking, or 82msec after the data is input if error checking is configured. The time between transmissions is set by the transmit and receive hold-off times configured by the user. 3.4 Controlled Mode In controlled mode, data is only transferred between two modules (that is, a point to point link). One of the modules is configured as a master unit and the other as a slave unit. There can also be up to five intermediate repeaters in the link. Each 905U-D unit is configured with a unit address - only the unit with an address matching the destination address of the radio message will process the message and output the serial data. To establish a link, the master will transmit a special connect message. This initial message will not include any data. If the slave unit receives the initial message, and is not already connected to another 905U-D unit, it will return an acknowledgment message. Both units will activate their DCD LED, and also activate their DCD output signal. If the master Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 21 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual unit does not receive the acknowledgment, the DCD output will reset. When the connection is made (DCD set), the 905U-D units can transmit data to each other. The destination address may be configured two ways. The AT&Z command (see Section 4, Configuration) enters an auto-dial address. The ATD command enters a single-dial address. The AT&Z command only has to entered once, and the 905U-D remembers the destination address. The ATD command has to be used each time a connection is to be made - the 905U-D will not remember the previous destination address. If an auto-dial address is configured, the master will transmit the connect message every ten seconds until it receives an acknowledgment. If a single-dial address , the master unit will try to connect five times - if no acknowledgment is received, a BUSY or NO ANSWER response is sent to the host connected to the master. The host must then issue the ATD dial command to the 905U-D before it will try to connect again. The auto-dial operation is similar to a fixed line modem, where the destination address is always the same. Once the auto-dial address is configured, it does not need to be entered again. If the communications link fails (DCD resets), the master unit will automatically send connect messages to re-establish the link. The single-dial operation is similar to a dial-up modem. The 905U-D will make a connection to another unit only when it is told to by the host device. If the communications link fails for any reason, the master unit will not send a connect message until it receives another ATD command. Either of the two modules at the end of the link can be the master unit - the master unit has the responsibility of establishing the radio link and periodically checking the link. Data can be transferred in both directions - from the master to the slave and from the slave to the master. Once the communications channel has been established, the 905U-D unit will accept input data and send radio messages with data. On the RS232 port, if CTS/RTS is enabled, the CTS signal will be active when the input data buffer is not full, AND the RTS signal at the destination module is active. The local CTS/RTS status will reflect the remote CTS/RTS status, as well as the local input buffer. Note that CTS/RTS is disabled in the default configuration - if this feature is required, it must be enabled (refer Configuration Chapter 4). If CTS/RTS is not enabled, then data will be lost after the input buffer (8KB) is full. When a 905U-D unit receives a radio message, it will check the system address and destination address, and also the error-check (optional). If these are correct, it will return a ACK (acknowledgment) message to the source unit. If the system address or destination address is not correct, then no return message is sent. If the addresses are correct, but the error-check incorrect, then a NACK (error) message is sent to the source unit. If the source unit receives a NACK message, or does not receive any message within 1 second, it will re-transmit the same message. It will attempt to transmit the message up to five times, with a 5 second delay between attempts. If the unit still does not receive an ACK message after five attempts, it will reset the DCD LED, and reset the DCD output. The unsuccessful message will be held in the input buffer until the communications link is re-

established. If the source module is the master unit, then it will immediately send connect messages every ten seconds to the slave unit. If the source module was the slave unit, then it will wait until it receives a connect message from the master and the communications channel is re-established. During normal operation, if there has been no radio activity for a period (called the update period), the master unit will transmit the connect message to check the radio path. The update period is a time configured by the user. Page 22 May 2000 Chapter Three Operation Establishing a Communications Link Master Unit Listen to ensure channel is clear connect transmit If clear, message Radio TX LED flashes Radio RX LED flashes Acknowledgment received okay communication link established Set DCD LED and output Successful Communications Source Module Serial data is received Serial RX LED flashes Listen to ensure channel is clear Radio TX LED flashes If clear, transmit message

Slave Unit Receives message Radio RX LED flashes Check system and destination address If OK, set DCD LED and output If message OK, transmit back an ACK message.

Radio TX LED flashes Destination Module

Receive message Radio RX LED flashes Check system and destination address If OK, check error-check If message okay, back an ACK message. Radio TX LED flashes transmit Serial data is output Serial TX LED flashes Radio RX LED flashes Acknowledgment received okay -

communication complete

Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 23 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual Destination Module Receives message RX LED flashes Check system and destination incorrect, address If transmit no message and no serial output. If addresses are correct, check error-check. If incorrect, transmit a NACK message TX LED flashes Unsuccessful Communications Source Module Listen to ensure channel is clear TX LED flashes If clear, transmit message

Radio RX LED flashes

NACK message or no message received Retry up to four times If no ACK message received after five attempts Comms fail output activated DCD signal and DCD LED reset

The time taken to transmit a message is :-

|------------------HEADER--------------------|--------------------DATA-----------|

lead-in 40msec system unit repeater dest. zero data address addr addrs's addr byte error check (if configured) 2 1 0 - 5 1 1 no. of data bytes No. of bytes The time for each HEADER byte is 3.8mSec @4800 bits/sec, and the time for each DATA byte is 1.9msec @ 4800 bits/sec. If error checking is not configured at the receiving unit, data will start to be output approx 1msec after the "zero" byte has been received. If error checking is configured, data will be output approx 2msec after the end of the message. For example, a message with 20 bytes of data transmitted at 4800 bits/sec with no repeaters, will be output approx 88msec after the data is input, assuming that error checking is configured. 2 The time between transmissions is set by the transmit and receive hold-off times configured by the user. Intermediate Repeaters Where intermediate repeaters are configured, each repeater will re-transmit the message onto the next address. When the destination address is reached, the destination module will return an acknowledgment (ACK) with the reverse address structure as the received message. Page 24 May 2000 Chapter Three Operation If error-checking is selected, then the destination module will only return a ACK if the error check is valid. If the error check is not valid, then a NACK message is returned. If the error-

checking function is not selected, then the destination module will return an ACK every time it receives a message (a NACK is never sent). Each repeater will re-transmit the ACK or NACK message until it is received by the source module. The source module will calculate a waiting time for the acknowledgment - this time is based on the radio baud rate, the message length (number of bytes) and the number of repeaters. If the source module receives a NACK, or it does not receive an ACK within the waiting time, it will transmit the same message again. The 905U-D will transmit the message up to five times. If it does not receive an ACK after the 5th attempt, it will assume communications failure and reset its DCD status. The unsuccessful message will not be re-transmitted and will be lost. Repeater Communications Unit C Repeater Unit D Destination

Unit B Repeater Receive message Re-transmit message Successful Unit A Source Transmit message Receive ACK

Receive message Re-transmit message

Receive message Transmit ACK Output data Receive ACK Re-transmit

ACK Receive ACK Re-transmit ACK Repeater units may also act as destination addresses for some transmissions and output data to a host device. 3.5 What Operating Mode to Use ?

Transparent or Controlled Mode?

Transparent mode provides faster operation as the units do not acknowledge transmissions received. However reliable operation in transparent mode will only occur if the host devices check the messages and return acknowledgments. Generally, if a device is able to operate on a RS485 multi-drop serial link, it is suitable for transparent mode. Controlled mode is suitable for point-to-point links, rather than multi-point networks. If it is not known whether a device is suitable for transparent mode, then controlled mode should be used. If faster operation is desired, then transparent mode can be tried, and if the system operates reliably, then transparent mode is suitable. Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 25 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual It is possible to configure different units in the same system with different operating modes, however the system will not operate. A 905U-D unit configured in one mode will not process a message received from a unit in the alternate mode. Error Check ?

Error-checking may be configured in both transparent and controlled mode. When the error-

check is configured, two additional bytes are attached to the end of each message. These bytes are used to detect any corruption of the data when it is received at another 905U-D unit. When a unit with error-check configured receives a radio message, it will not output data until it has received the whole message and ensures that the error-check is correct. If the unit does not have error-check configured, then it will output data as it is received. Hence operation of the units is faster if error-check is not configured. We recommend that units in the same system have the same error-check configuration, however it is possible for users to configure the units differently. If a unit without error-check configured receives a message which includes an error-check, then the unit will treat the additional two bytes as data and output them to the host device. If a unit with error-check configured, receives a message without an error-check, it will treat the last two data bytes as the error check - the error-check will always be incorrect and no data will be output. Error-check is strongly recommended for controlled mode operation. If error-check is not configured, then a 905U-D unit will transmit an acknowledgment message (ACK) whenever it receives a radio message, without checking for errors. If error-check is configured, the unit will only transmit an ACK message if the error-check is correct. If it is incorrect, an error message (NACK) is returned to the source address. Autoconnect or Host-connect modes?

If the 905U-D is connected to a PC and the PC will automatically set-up the 905U-D on start-

up, then a host-connect mode should be used (modes 0 3). In host-connect, the 905U-D will start up in configuration mode. If you want the 905U-D to start up in operating mode, then use the autoconnect modes (4 7). 3.6 Operating Problems Most operating problems relate to an inadequate radio path, or radio interference. Before installing a system, bench test the complete system with the 905U-D units near each other. This test eliminates the radio path or interference as a factor, and ensures that the system will operate in the way that you want. It is not necessary to connect aerials, however a small length of wire should be inserted into the middle pin of the coaxial connector - this will act as an aerial. If the bench test does not give adequate performance, then you need to adjust the configuration parameters. We recommend that you do not install the system until you are happy with the bench test performance. If a system gives poor performance after it is installed, check the adequacy of the radio path

- refer to the Diagnostics Section 6. Page 26 May 2000 Chapter Three Operation Interference will only cause a problem if the amplitude of the interference is comparable to the radio signal from the 905U-D units. If the interference level is relatively small, then it will not affect the performance of the system. If interference is causing a problem, try to improve the normal radio level by mounting the aerials higher or in a better location. This not always possible. If in transparent mode, try controlled mode. System performance may be improved by changing the following parameters :-

If configured for a radio data rate of 9600 bits/sec, reduce the rate to 4800 bits/sec. If large radio messages are being transmitted, reduce the maximum message length, and transmit the data in more messages of smaller size. Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 27 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual Chapter Four CONFIGURATION 4.1 Before Configuring Configuration comprises selecting parameter values for the operation of the 905U-D unit. Before you start configuration, parameter settings must be decided. The main parameters are :-

Character type. You need to find out the character type of the host devices connected to the 905U-D units. The most common character type is 8 data bits, no parity, 1 start bit and 1 stop bit. Serial Data Rate. You need to find out the serial data rate used by the host devices. The most common serial data rate is 9600 bits/sec. Radio Data Rate. You need to decide what radio data rate you wish to use. It does not have to be the same as the serial data rate. Remember that the radio range for 9600 bits/sec will not be as good as that for lower data rates. Generally the data sent between process control equipment is small, and 9600 bit/sec is not required. We recommend that you use 4800 bits/sec unless your application requires the faster data rate. Operating mode . You need to decide which operating mode you wish to use. Modes are transparent or controlled, error-checked or no-error-check, and autoconnect or host-

connect. These modes are discussed in more detail in following sections. The other configuration parameters do not need to be selected, and are provided as a means of "fine tuning" the operation of the 905U-D units. Configuration may be performed from a terminal using Hayes commands, or by using the miniature switches under the blue cover on the front of the unit. The first step in configuration is to put the radio modem into Configuration Mode. 4.2 Configuration Mode A 905U-D network comprises modules with the same "system" address. In controlled mode, each module is also configured with a unit address between 0 and 127 - there can only be 127 modules in the one system. In transparent mode, modules are not configured with a unit address, and there is no limit to the number of modules in a system (except for the capacity of the radio channel). 4.3 Hayes Commands The 905U-D unit may be configured by a host device using Hayes AT commands. Configuration may be done by a user (with a PC terminal as the host device) or it can be done automatically by a host device such as PLC or SCADA. The AT commands are ASCII messages designed for use with conventional telephone modems. Page 28 May 2000 Chapter Four Configuration Before a 905U-D unit will accept Hayes commands, it must be in configuration mode. A host device may force the unit to configuration mode by sending three escape characters -

+++. The default escape character is +, however this may be changed as it is one of the configuration parameters Note that in the Host-connect operating modes, the 905U-D units start up in configuration mode. These modes (0, 1, 2 or 3) simulate the operation of telephone or leased-line modems, and may be used with standard host software designed with Hayes command control. Once in configuration mode, the 905U-D unit will accept a string of Hayes commands, and the configuration changes made. The changes will not however be stored in permanent memory (EEPROM) unless the Hayes command for recording the configuration (AT&W) is sent. When the configuration changes are made, the module must be put back into its operating mode by using the online Hayes command, ATO The 905U-D will automatically change from configuration mode to operating mode if there has been no AT command entry within a certain time. This time is one of the configuration parameters. The following Hayes commands are accepted by the 905U-D unit :

4.3.1 Unit Reset The ATZ command resets the unit as if power had been switched off and on. After power up, the configuration will be the last saved configuration - that is, the last configuration saved by the AT&W command. 4.3.2 Storing Configuration Parameters - Write Registers Once configuration parameters have been changed, they can be stored to non-volatile memory with the AT&W command. When the unit is reset from power up or via the ATZ command, the stored parameters are restored. 4.3.3 Default Values - Restore Factory Defaults The AT&F command will reset the configuration parameters to the default values. To reset the values and save them to nonvolatile memory, use AT&F&W Refer to Appendix A section 1.1.10 for using the configuration switches to reset to factory defaults. 4.3.4 S-Registers The E405 provides 15 S-Registers to configure the operation of the unit. S-Registers may be read using the Hayes command ATSn = xxx, where n is the number of the configuration parameter, and xxx is the value shown below for each parameter. The entire configuration parameters may be viewed by the Hayes command AT&V. The configuration parameters and values are :

Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 29 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual Operating mode (S0) ATS0 = xxx Default = 4 xxx Option Connect Mode 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Transparent mode without error-check Transparent mode with error-check Controlled mode without error-check Controlled mode with error-check Transparent mode without error-check Transparent mode with error-check Controlled mode without error-check Controlled mode with error-check Transparent mode repeater Host Host Host Host Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto NOTE The operating mode may also be changed using the mode command (AT&Mx) Operating modes 0 to 3 try to duplicate the operation of conventional telephone modems, and can be used with software designed to operate with telephone modems. The 905U-D units will start up in configuration mode, expecting Hayes command configuration. See 3.3 Controlled Mode for a description of operation. Tail time (S1) ATS1 = xxx Default = 0 where xxx is the tail time in 10 msec increments ( xxx = 20 for 200 msec ) A tail time may be configured which keeps the radio transmitter active at the end of each message. The maximum tail time is 2.55 seconds. The tail time value is the 8-bit binary equivalent of the desired time in 10 msec increments. Escape character (S2) ATS2 = xxx Default = 43 (+) where xxx is the decimal ASCII value of the character. The default value is 43 (+). A host device may force the unit to configuration mode by sending three escape characters

- +++. The default escape character is +, however this may be changed by the host device. ATS2 = 255 will prevent the unit entering command mode. ATS3 = xxx Maximum message length (S3) Default = 265 where the maximum message length in bytes is equal to twice xxx plus 10, or 2 *

(xxx) + 10. For example, ATS3 = 10 gives a maximum length of 30 bytes. The message length parameter selects the maximum length (in bytes) of the data sent in each radio message. The length may be selected between 10 bytes and 520 bytes. The message length is equal to 2x(VALUE)+10, where VALUE is the decimal equivalent of the 8-

bit code entered. Serial data rate (S4) To select or change the serial data rate, enter the following VALUE code. The serial data rate can be different at different 905U-D modules in the same system. The default value is 9600 bits/sec. ATS4 = xxx Default = 8 Page 30 May 2000 Chapter Four Configuration Bits/sec 50 75 150 300 600 1200 xxx 0 1 2 3 4 5 Bits/sec xxx 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 6 7 8 9 10 Radio data rate (S5) To select or change the radio data rate, enter the following VALUE code. The radio data rate should be the same at each 905U-D module in the same system. The default value is 4800 bits/sec. ATS5 = xxx Default = 1 Bits/sec 1200 2400 xxx 3 2 Bits/sec 4800 9600 xxx 1 0 System address, high byte (S6) ATS6 = xxx where xxx is the Decimal value of the first byte of the system address. The system address comprises two bytes. Note that the high byte cannot be more than 127. System address, low byte (S7) ATS7 = xxx where xxx is the Decimal value of the second byte of the system address. Unit address (S8) ATS8 = xxx where xxx is the decimal value of the unit address. Note that xxx cannot be 0 (zero) or more than 127. In controlled mode, each module is configured with a unit address between 1 and 127 -

there can only be 127 modules in the one system. In transparent mode, modules are not configured with a unit address (the value of S8 is ignored), and there is no limit to the number of modules in a system (except for the capacity of the radio channel). ATS9 = x Default = 4 Character Type (S9) The Character Type parameter configures the character format, the flow control on the serial port, and the use of DTR low power mode. The character format is the data bits, start bits, and parity configuration. The serial port flow control may be configured for to enable or disable RTS/CTS control. In all RS-485 applications and some RS-232 applications, RTS/CTS control must be disabled. DTR low power mode is explained in sections 3.1 and 4.3.5 of this manual - it is only used in modes 6 or 7 with an autodial address. The character type in the 905U-D will change as soon as the ATS9 entry is made. The character type on the configuration terminal should change at the same time such that the 905U-D understands any subsequent commands. Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 31 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual NOTE : These values are valid for software version 1.11 and later. For earlier versions, refer to your distributor. To find out the software version, use the ATI command. Data Bits Start Bits Stop Bits Parity CTS/ RTS control VALUE VALUE DTR low power DTR normal power mode mode 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 even odd even odd none even odd none none even odd even odd none even odd none none enabled enabled enabled enabled enabled enabled enabled enabled enabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled 8 9 11 16 3 1 2 0 10 12 13 15 20 7 5 6 4 14 40 41 43 48 35 33 34 32 42 44 45 47 52 39 37 38 36 46 Display Mode (S10) NOTE : These values are valid for software version 1.11 and later. For earlier versions, refer to your distributor. To find out the software version, use the ATI command. Default = 3 ATS10 = x ECHO VERBOSE QUIET VALUE RINGING response VALUE no RINGING response Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 1 2 3 8 9 10 11 Page 32 May 2000 Chapter Four Configuration ECHO VERBOSE QUIET VALUE RINGING response VALUE no RINGING response Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled 4 5 6 7 12 13 14 15 NOTE: This register is accessible by the Echo command (ATE0, or ATE1), Quiet command (ATQ0, or ATQ1), and Verbose command (ATVO, or ATV1) Refer to section 4.3.6 for an explanation of the Ringing response feature. Command Mode Timeout (S11) ATS11 = x Default = 60 Where x = timeout in seconds If there has been no AT commands entered within this time, the 905U-D will automatically change from configuration mode to operating mode. If S11 is set to 0 (zero), the 905U-D will not automatically change, and will only change to operating mode when a ATO command is entered. NOTE : These values are valid for software version 1.09 and later. For earlier versions, refer to your distributor. To find out the software version, use the ATI command. Transmit Hold-off Time (S12) ATS12 = xxx Default = 70 where xxx is the hold-off time in 1 msec increments ( xxx = 20 for 20 msec ) A delay time may be configured such that the 405U unit will not transmit during the hold-off time after transmitting a previous message. The maximum hold-off time is 255 msec. The transmit hold-off time value is the 8-bit binary equivalent of the desired time in 1 msec increments. Receive Hold-off Time (S13) ATS13 = xxx Default = 20 where xxx is the hold-off time in 1 msec increments ( xxx = 20 for 20 msec ) A delay time may be configured such that the 405U unit will not transmit a message during the hold-off time after receiving a message. The maximum hold-off time is 255 msec. The receive hold-off time value is the 8-bit binary equivalent of the desired time in 1 msec increments. Connect Update Time (S14) 100 ATS14 = xxx Default =

where xxx is the hold-off time in 0.1 minute increments ( xxx = 20 for 2 min.) In controlled mode, the 405U unit will transmit a connect message if there has been no activity on the radio channel for the update time. The connect update time value is the 8-bit binary equivalent of the desired time in 0.1 minute increments. 4.3.5 Changing Destination/Repeater Address - autodial The destination address and repeater addresses may be changed with the AT&Z command:-

AT&Z <first repeater>,<second repeater>,. ,<destination>

Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 33 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual The module will automatically attempt to connect to the destination address. For example, to set the destination address to 18 with repeater addresses 2 and 8, the command would be - AT&Z2,8,18 If the destination address was to be 105 with no repeaters, the command would be AT&Z105 or AT&Z105&W (this command also stores the change in permanent memory). To clear the address values, use the command AT&Z<enter>

In modes 6 and 7, the 405U will only connect if the DTR signal is high (active). If the DTR signal goes low (inactive), the 405U will break the connection. If low power mode is selected at S9, then the 405U will also go to low power mode. 4.3.6 Connecting to a Remote Module single dial If the 405U unit is already connected to a remote module, then the connection should be cancelled by using the hang-up command, ATH To connect to a remote module, use the dial command ATD <first repeater>,<second repeater>,. ,<destination>

For example, to set the destination address to 67 with repeater addresses 32 and 48, the command would be - ATD32,48,67 The module will respond with one of the following messages :-

RINGING the module is in the process of connecting (only if RINGING is selected at S10). the module has successfully connected the destination module is already connected to another module the module was unable to connect to the destination address CONNECT BUSY NO ANSWER If the destination address was to be 119 with no repeaters, the command would be ATD119. To cancel or hang-up a connection, use the ATH command. The ATD and ATH commands may be mixed. For example, ATHD119 (this command also clears the previous connection before trying to make the new connection). 4.3.7 Reading Configuration Parameters Host devices are able to read the value of configuration parameters by using the ATSn?

command, where "n" is the number of the configuration parameter. 4.3.8 Unit Test commands - AT&Tx Test commands are available via the command AT&Tx, where x is the test number requested. Many of these tests will be successful only during factory test. Refer to the Diagnostics section of this manual (chapter 6) for a detailed listing of the test commands available. 4.3.9 Version Information - ATI The command ATI will result In a response from the 405U module with the software version of the 405U. For example, 405U V1.09 Page 34 May 2000 Chapter Four Configuration 4.3.10 Character Type - AT&Bx This command allows configuration of the character format and flow control used on the serial port. The x value is the same as the character type command under S-register 9. Note: The value of this setting is also available via S-register S9 4.3.11 Character Type - AT&Mx This command allows configuration of the operating mode. The x value is the same as the character type command under S-register 0. Note: The value of this setting is also available via S-register S0. 4.3.12 Verbose mode control, Local Echo control, and Quiet mode The following commands from the host control the responses of the 405U unit to the Hayes commands. ATV0 ATV1 ATQ0 ATQ1 ATE0 ATE1 numeric responses verbal responses response displayed No response displayed disable local echo enable local echo Note: the values of these settings are also available via S-register S10. 4.3.13 Responses The 405U modules provide responses to the Hayes commands. The responses will be either in verbal (ASCII) or numeric, depending on the ATV configuration. The following responses will be issued by the module :-

NUMERIC VERBAL OK CONNECT NO CARRIER ERROR BUSY NO ANSWER RINGING 0 1 3 4 7 8 13 MEANING Command accepted Connected to remote unit Connection lost to remote unit Invalid command Destination unit already connected No response from destination address Attempting to connect to destination unit Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 35 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual 4.4 Configuration Examples Transparent Mode Extending a PLC Network PLC PLC PLC RS485 9.6KB RS485 38.4KB 405U 405U 9.6KB 9.6KB 405U REPEATER DATA = 7 DATA BITS, 1 START, 2 STOP, EVEN PARITY Unit No. 1 Configuration Set the module to factory default settings:

Set the system address to a random number:

Set the serial data rate to 38400 Set the radio data rate to 9600 Set the character type to 7,1,2,even AT&F ATS6 = 38 ATS4 = 10 ATS5 = 0 ATS9 = 15 ATS7 = 92 Exit and save the configuration AT&W ATO The operating mode will already be in transparent mode from the factory default settings. The other default values for the other parameters will likely be OK. Repeater Configuration Set the module to factory default settings:

AT&F Set the system address to the same random number: ATS6 = 38 ATS7 = 92 Set the radio data rate to 9600 ATS5 = 0 Set the operating mode to Transparent Repeater ATS0 = 8 Exit and save the configuration AT&W ATO Unit No. 2 Configuration Set the module to factory default settings:

AT&F Set the system address to the same random number: ATS6 = 38 ATS7 = 92 Set the radio data rate to 9600 Set the character type to 7,1,2,even ATS5 = 0 ATS9 = 15 Page 36 May 2000 Chapter Four Configuration Exit and save the configuration AT&W ATO Note that it was not necessary to set the serial data rate as 9600 is the default setting. Controlled Mode Point-to-point link with repeaters Assume that default settings are used for data rates and character types. The only configuration required is addressing. Module #1 Source Repeater Repeater Destination

#1 ----------------> #2 -----------------> #100 --------------------> #3

#101 Apart from being a repeater in the 1 - 3 link, 100 is also in a separate link to 101 Set the module to factory default settings:

AT&F Set the system address to a random number:

ATS6 = 17 ATS7 = 50 Set the unit address to 1 ATS8 = 1 Set the operating mode to controlled mode Set the autodial address to 3 via 2, 100 ATS0 = 7 AT&Z2,100,3 Exit and save the configuration AT&W ATO Note that module #1 is the master unit in this link. Module #2 Set the module to factory default settings:

AT&F Set the system address to the same random number: ATS6 = 17 ATS7 = 50 Set the unit address to 2 ATS8 = 2 Set the operating mode to controlled mode ATS0 = 7 Exit and save the configuration AT&W ATO Module #3 Set the module to factory default settings:

AT&F Set the system address to the same random number: ATS6 = 17 ATS7 = 50 Set the unit address to 3 ATS8 = 3 Set the operating mode to controlled mode ATS0 = 7 Exit and save the configuration AT&W ATO Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 37 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual Module #100 Note that #100 is the master unit for a link between #100 and #101, It is also acting as repeater in the #1 to #3 link. The system address for #100 and #101 must be the same as the other modules so that #100 can act as a repeater. Set the module to factory default settings:

AT&F Set the system address to the same random number: ATS6 = 17 ATS7 = 50 Set the unit address to 100 Set the operating mode to controlled mode Set the autodial address to 101 ATS8 = 100 ATS0 = 7 AT&Z101 Exit and save the configuration AT&W ATO The configuration for #101 is not shown as it is not part of the active link. Page 38 May 2000 Chapter Five Specifications Chapter Five SPECIFICATIONS General EMC specification Radio specification Housing Terminal blocks LED indication Operating Temperature Power Supply Nominal supply 12V supply EN55022 (CISPR 22) EN 50082-1, EN 300 683 AS 3548 MPT 1329 UK EN-300-220 AS 4268.2 AUST RFS29 NZ 130 x 185 x 60mm DIN rail mount Removable OK operation, Serial RX and TX, Radio RX and TX, DCD active

-20 to 60 degrees C 12VDC or 24VDC 11.3 - 15 VDC 24V supply 18 - 28 VDC Current Drain @ 12VDC Current Drain @ 24VDC Radio Transceiver Single channel Frequency Transmit power 150 mA quiescent 30mA (low power mode) 80 mA quiescent 20mA (low power mode) synthesised, selectable band 4MHz 405 - 490 MHz 220 235 MHz 10 - 500 mW 5W 89/336/EEC 458 MHz, 500 mW EIRP 430 - 450 MHz, 10 - 500 mW 472 MHz, 100 mW EIRP 458 MHz, 500 mW EIRP Powder-coated, extruded aluminium Suitable for 2.5sqmm conductors Overvoltage and reverse voltage protected Overvoltage and reverse voltage protected During transmission 500mA During transmission 300mA Direct frequency modulation 12.5 kHz channel spacing 405-490 MHz 220 235 MHz Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 39 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual Spurious emissions Frequency Stability Receiver Sensitivity Signal detect / RSSI Expected line-of-sight range

@ 4800 bit/sec RX - <-57 dBm TX - <-37 dBm

+/- 1. 0 kHz 0.4uV at 12dB SINAD

-120 to -80 dBm 2 km @ 10mW EIRP 5 km @ 100mW EIRP 10 km @ 500 mW EIRP Range may be extended by up to 5 intermediate modules as repeaters, in controlled mode Aerial Connector Female BNC coaxial Protected by gas discharge surge arrestor Serial Ports RS232 Port RS485 Port Data rate (bit/sec) -

configurable Byte format Output Signal DCD (communications) active System Parameters Operating modes System address User Configuration DB9 male DCE 2 pin terminal block 50, 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 7 or 8 data bits FET output, 30 VDC 500mA Transparent mode Controlled mode Configurable 15 bit RTS/CTS/DCD hardware signals provided Typical distance 1 - 2 km Stop/start/parity bits configurable In transparent mode:

always ON. In controlled mode:

ON when radio link is established Broadcast system Addressed communications with acknowledged Hayes commands from host device. Or via on-board DIP switches Page 40 May 2000 Chapter Six Troubleshooting Chapter Six TROUBLESHOOTING 6.1 INDICATOR OK LED OFF OK LED ON Radio TX LED ON Radio RX LED ON Serial RX LED ON Diagnostics Chart CONDITION Continuously Continuously Flashes briefly GREEN flash RED flash GREEN flash RED flash GREEN continuously MEANING Power supply failure CPU failure Normal Operation Radio transmitting Radio receiving data Weak radio signal Serial Port Receiving CTS low Configuration Mode Radio RX and Serial RX LED ON RED flash for 10 secs after power up Configuration

(EEPROM failure) corruption Serial TX LED ON DCD LED ON Flashes briefly Continuously Serial port transmitting In transparent mode, always on. In controlled mode, a radio link has been established. The green OK LED on the front panel indicates correct operation of the unit. This LED extinguishes on failure as described above. When the OK LED extinguishes shutdown state is indicated. On processor failure, or on failure during startup diagnostics, the unit shuts down, and remains in shutdown until the fault is rectified. 6.2 Test Functions 6.2.1 Radio Testing using Tone Reversals This function allows the unit to be configured to continuously transmit a sequence of alternate zeros and ones on the radio. This function provides the facility to check VSWR of aerials during installation, as well as checking the fade margin of the path between two units (see below - received signal strength indication). Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 41 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual The tone reversals function is initiated by setting all of the DIL switches to ON, and holding down the red button for approximately 5 seconds (until the Serial RX LED indicates RED continuously). On releasing the button, the RX LED will flash continuously, and the TX LED will light, indicating that the radio transmitter is on. 6.2.2 Diagnostic Functions - AT&Tx To aid in the checking and setup of the 405U unit diagnostic functions in the 405U are provided using the standard Hayes AT commands. Several of these functions are used during factory test, and will not work correctly if the unit is not connected to the factory test jig. The table below outlines the functions of the various tests:

Test Command AT&T0 AT&T1 AT&T2 AT&T3 AT&T4 AT&T5 AT&T6 AT&T7 AT&T8 AT&T9 AT&TA AT&TB AT&TC Function Factory test only Factory test only Factory test only Factory test only Factory test only Internal RAM test Nonvolatile Memory (EEPROM) test Configuration Switch test Received Signal Strength Display Transmit Tone reversals BER Test - Master BER Test - Slave BER Test Two direction The tests most useful for diagnosing system problems are received signal strength display and transmit tone reversals. AT&T9 - Transmit Tone Reversals This provides the same function as described above (Tone Reversals). This function may be used to check VSWR of aerials, and may be used in conjunction with the Signal option

(described below) to check the path between two 405U units. AT&T8 - Received Signal Strength Display This option provides for testing the radio path between two 405U units. Although a pair of units may communicate successfully, radio communication may be affected by a range of influences, including atmospheric conditions, changing landscape, degradation of aerials or co-axial cable, low battery voltage etc. Fade margin is an indication of how far a radio path can deteriorate before reliable communication becomes unreliable. Page 42 May 2000 Chapter Six Troubleshooting When using this feature, the current value of the received signal strength is displayed in dBm

(decibels referenced to 1 mW). This value is updated every half second. To check the radio path between two units, select the signal option at the local unit. The remote unit may then be set up for tone reversals (refer 1 above) and the signal level read from the computer screen. We have selected a bit error rate (BER) of 1 in 300 as the point at which unreliable communications occurs. The following table lists the minimum signal required for reliable communications (BER > 1 in 300). A system with the minimum signal level will not stay reliable under all conditions, because of changing factors such as environmental conditions. A fade margin of at least 15 dB should be allowed for to take account of these factors. The table also lists our recommended minimum signal level, taking this margin into account. Radio Baud Rate Minimum signal for BER

= 1 in 300 Recommended minimum signal 9600 4800

-100 dBm

-107 dBm

-85 dBm

-92 dBm In areas experiencing radio interference or high background noise, reliable communications may not be achievable even with this signal level. To determine if interference is occurring, the signal option may be selected without any other 405U units active. In a normal radio environment, a reading of at most -110 dBm should be displayed. If a reading above this value is displayed (for example -100 dBm), then the received signal strength from the remote should be at least 15 dB higher than the background noise for reliable communication. Example:

AT&T8 RSSI Display - press a key to exit

-88 dBm Displayed signal level of background noise/interference Minimum signal level for reliable comms AT&T8 RSSI Display - press a key to exit

-73 dBm When using directional aerials (YAGI aerials) this feature may be used to align the aerial in the correct direction by selecting the peak signal when moving the aerial. Setup the remote unit to transmit tone reversals as described above, and observe the signal indication while adjusting the orientation of the aerial. A peak in signal level indicates optimum orientation of the aerial. Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 43 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual 6.2.3 Bit Error Rate Test (BER) BER may be tested in one direction by typing AT&TA (BER master) at the sending unit and typing AT&TB (BER slave) at the receiving unit. The sending unit will repeatedly send pseudo-random frames, and the receiving unit will check these frames for errors. If a terminal is connected to the sending unit, the pseudo-random data is displayed as it is transmitted. If a terminal is connected to the receiving unit, then the test results are displayed. An example of the receiving units display is here. Test 109 TotTest 109 kbit Level

-77dBm Errors TotErr Extra 0 0 3 Test Errors Extra Level TotErr TotTest

the sequence number of the last received frame the number of bit errors in the last received frame any extra characters at the end of the frame (negative numbers indicate frame dropped out early) the RSSI level when the frame was received. The total errors received during this test. The total number of bits sent (in 1000s) Occasionally during testing, the following may be displayed:

Test Errors TotErr Extra TotTest Level Bad Header This indicated that the header information has been corrupted. Corrupted headers do not contribute to the bit errors, which are calculated only on the 1,000 bit frame. BER testing may also be performed in both directions simultaneously. In this case, a remote module is set up to Transparent mode repeater operation, (ATS0=8) and the BER test is performed on the local module using the command AT&TC (loopback Bit Error Test). In this case, the display is identical to the display on the BER slave unit above, but the displayed bit errors are a total for the round trip, so will be the sum of the bit errors in both directions. Page 44 May 2000 Chapter Seven Warranty and Service Chapter Seven WARRANTY & SERVICE We are pleased that you have purchased this product. Your purchase is guaranteed against defects for a 365 day warranty period, commencing from the date of purchase. This warranty does not extend to:

Failures caused by the operation of the equipment outside the particular product's specification. use of the 405U module not in accordance with this User Manual, or abuse, misuse, neglect or damage by external causes, or repairs, alterations, or modifications undertaken other than by an authorised Service Agent. Full product specifications and maintenance instructions are available from your Service Agent, your source of purchase, or from the master distributor in your country upon request and should be noted if you are in any doubt about the operating environment for your equipment purchase In the unlikely event of your purchase being faulty, your warranty extends to free repair or replacement of the faulty unit, after its receipt at the master distributor in your country. Our warranty does not include transport or insurance charges relating to a warranty claim. This warranty does not indemnify the purchaser of products for any consequential claim for damages or loss of operations or profits. Should you wish to make a warranty claim, or obtain service, please forward the module to the nearest authorised Service Agent along with proof of purchase. For details of authorised Service Agents, contact your sales distributor. Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 45 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual Appendix A Switch Configuration 1.0 Introduction In order to configure the 405U unit, or to change the configuration, the unit must be placed into Configuration Mode. When in this mode, the unit will not operate as transparent or controlled mode. Module configuration may be performed using the on-board miniature (DIP) switches or from the host device using Hayes AT command codes (refer to Section 4.3). In order to avoid radio interference between adjacent 405U networks, a "system address" is required to be configured. Each module within the one network must have the same system address. The system address may be any number between 1 and 32 767. To simplify matters, the system address may be just an arbitrary pattern of off and on switches (0s and 1s) - it is not important what the actual system address value is - as long as each module in the network has the same switch pattern for the system address. A system address of zero (all 0's) is not acceptable. NOTE:

The configuration used in your system should be recorded for future reference. This information will be required when the unit is initially configured, if a unit is replaced, if the system is to be expanded, or if units are tested with the internal Self Test configuration. Configuration record sheets are provided at the end of this manual. These sheets should be used to assist in planning the network for your application and to have the data readily available for entry. Entering a system address puts the 405U in Configuration Mode:

Carefully remove the blue plastic cover in the centre of the module to reveal the switches and red pushbutton underneath.

-------SYSTEM-------- 0 Set the chosen system address on the DIP switches as shown. Make sure the switch marked 0 is set to 0. Other switches can be in any chosen position.

---------ADDRESS-------- Press the red button for approx. 3 the Serial RX LED seconds - until indicates RED. The Serial RX LED will indicate GREEN on release of the button indicating the unit is in Configuration Mode Page 46 May 2000 Appendix A Switch Configuration Once the module is in configuration mode, transparent or controlled mode may be selected. This is achieved by entering in another switch pattern. If transparent mode is selected, no further configuration is required, and the module will automatically exit configuration mode. If controlled mode is selected, further entries are required for the addressing of the communications link. 1.0.1 Default Configuration The default configuration is the configuration set in the factory. When you receive new modules, they will have this configuration. The default configuration is transparent mode without error-checking, autoconnect mode, with serial data rates of 9600 bits/sec, and radio data rate of 4800 bit/sec. The serial ports will be set up for a byte format of 8 data bits, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit and no parity. Further details of default settings are included in Appendix A Section 1.1.10. 1.0.2 Transparent Mode To select transparent mode the following switch pattern is entered after the system address is entered :-

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 First enter the system address Enter the switch pattern Configuration mode will automatically exit and the RX LED will reset. The operating mode will be set to mode 4 (Transparent mode without error check). Refer to Configuration Parameters in Appendix A Section 1.1. 1.0.3 Controlled Mode In controlled mode, each module within a network must be configured with an individual unit address. Each module must have a unique unit address within the one system. Each controlled mode system may have up to 127 modules. Addresses may be in the range 1 to 127. Note that address 0 is not accepted - if this address is entered, the module exits configuration mode and you must start configuration again. This address is coded in binary on the DIP switches. Appendix B lists the switch code for each address between 1 and 127. To configure controlled mode, switch patterns are entered consecutively with the module unit address, any repeater addresses and the destination address. These switch patterns are entered after the system address has been entered. If more than one repeater is used in the radio link, then each repeater address is entered in order, starting with the first repeater and then the next repeater and so on. Up to five repeater addresses may be entered. If only one repeater is used, then only one repeater address is entered. If three are used, then three repeater addresses are entered - etc. The destination address is always the last address entered. If there are no repeaters used, then the destination address is entered immediately after the unit address. After the destination address is entered, a switch pattern with all 0s (all the switches off) is entered. The module then exits configuration mode. Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 47 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual Note that repeater and destination addresses are only entered for the master unit in each link. For slave units, only the unit address is entered. For modules which will just act as a repeater unit, just a unit address need be entered. For these modules, enter the exit pattern of all zeros after the unit address. To select controlled mode the following switch pattern is entered after the system address has been entered. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

----- ADDRESS -----

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 First enter the system address Enter the unit address Enter the repeater addresses (if any) the then enter in order, and destination address. When all of the addresses have been entered Enter all 0s Configuration mde will automatically exit and the RX LED will reset. The operating mode will be set to Controlled Mode with Error-Checking (mode 7) - refer to Appendix A Section 1.1, Configuration Parameters. Example Source Repeater Repeater Destination

#1 ----------------> #2 -----------------> #100 --------------------> #3

#101 Apart from being a repeater in the 1 - 3 link, 100 is also in a separate link to 101 Module #1 Configuration Module #1 is configured as the master unit . 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 System address 100 1001 0001 0010. Page 48 May 2000 Appendix A Switch Configuration 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Unit address is 0000001 (#1) First repeater address is 0000010 (#2) Second repeater address is 1100100

(#100) Destination address is 0000011 (#3) Configuration complete Module #2 Configuration Module #2 is the first repeater. As there is no host device connected, a destination address is not required. 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 System address 100100100010010. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Unit address is 0000010 (#2) Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 49 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Configuration complete Module #100 Configuration Module #100 is the second repeater in the link between #1 and #3. It also has a host device and transmits data to #101. It is configured as the master unit for the #100 - #101 link. As it has the unit address #100, it will also act as a repeater for #1 - #3. Note that the system address for #100 and #101 has to be the same as #1 and #3. If module #100 was the slave unit for the #100 - #101 link, then only the unit address would be required for the #100 configuration. 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 System address 100100100010010. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 Unit address is 1100100 (#100) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 Destination address is 1100101 (#101) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Configuration complete Page 50 May 2000 Appendix A Switch Configuration Module #3 Configuration As module #3 is the slave unit for this link, only the unit address is required for the configuration. 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 System address 100100100010010. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Unit address is 0000011 (#3) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Configuration complete 1.1 Configuration Parameters Configuration parameters may be configured or changed at any time by entering the appropriate switch code and pressing the red button continuously until the Serial RX LED indicates RED. When the red button is released, the RX LED will return to normal. The 405U module will reset and start-up as if power had been disconnected. Each parameter has a default value which is set in the factory. All of the parameters do not need to be set - only those which you wish to change.. Each switch entry will be of the following pattern :-

--PARAM-- 1 0 0 0

-----------VALUE---------- Enter the code with the parameter code (PARAM) and the parameter value (VALUE) chosen and press button until RX LED lights. Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 51 905U-D Radio Modem Module User Manual 1.1.1 Operating Mode PARAM = 0 0 0 0 Default = 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Mode Value Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Transparent mode without error-check Transparent mode with error-check Controlled mode without error-check Controlled mode with error-check Transparent mode without error-check Transparent mode with error-check Controlled mode without error-check Controlled mode with error-check Transparent mode repeater Connect Mode Host Host Host Host Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Host connect modes are suitable for use with host devices that can drive leased-line or dial-

up modems. Units in Host-connect mode power-up in Configuration Mode. They require a Hayes command to make a connection. eg. ATO for Leased-line or ATDxx - see 4.3 Hayes Commands. Autoconnect modes will automatically establish a connection on power-up and automatically try to re-establish a connection if it is lost. Note that the programming of a system, unit or destination address using the DIL switches will cause the unit to default to Mode 4 transparent mode or Mode 7 controlled mode. For this reason, the Operating Mode parameter must be programmed (if mode 4 or mode 7 are unsuitable) after entering the address information. 1.1.2 Tail Time PARAM = 0 0 0 1 Default = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 A tail time may be configured which keeps the radio channel open at the end of each message. The maximum tail time is 2.55 seconds. The tail time value is the 8-bit binary equivalent of the desired time in 10 msec increments. Hence for a desired tail time of 100 msec, a VALUE code of ten (00001010 ) is entered. For the maximum time of 2.55 secs, a VALUE code of 255 (11111111) is entered. The default tail time is zero seconds - that is, no tail time. Appendix A lists the 8-bit patterns for each value between 0 and 255. 1.1.3 Message Length PARAM = 0 0 1 1 Default = 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The message length parameter selects the maximum length (in bytes) of the data sent in each radio message. The length may be selected between 10 bytes and 520 bytes. The message length is equal to 2x(VALUE)+10, where VALUE is the decimal equivalent of the 8-

bit code entered. Page 52 May 2000 Appendix A Switch Configuration Hence for a desired message of 10 bytes, a VALUE code of zero (00000000 ) is entered. For the maximum length of 520 bytes, a MESSL code of 255 (11111111) is entered. The default message length is 520 bytes. 1.1.4 Serial Data Rate PARAM = 0 1 0 0 Default = 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 To select or change the serial data rate, enter the following VALUE code. The serial data rate can be different at different 405U modules in the same system. The default value is 9600 bits/sec. Serial Data Rate

(bits/sec) VALUE VALUE 50 75 150 300 600 1200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Serial Data Rate

(bits/sec) 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1.1.5 Radio Data Rate PARAM = 0 1 0 1 Default = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 To select or change the radio data rate, enter the following VALUE code. The radio data rate should be the same at each 405U module in the same system. The default value is 4800 bits/sec. Radio Data Rate VALUE Radio Data Rate VALUE

(bits/sec) 1200 2400 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

(bits/sec) 4800 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1.1.6 Transmit Hold-off Time PARAM = 1 1 0 0 Default = 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 A delay time may be configured such that the 405U unit will not transmit during the hold-off time after transmitting a previous message. The maximum hold-off time is 255 msec. The transmit hold-off time value is the 8-bit binary equivalent of the desired time in 1 msec increments. Hence for a desired hold-off time of 10 msec, a VALUE code of ten (00001010 ) is entered. For the maximum time of 255 msec, a VALUE code of 255 (11111111) is entered. The default tail time is 40 msec. Appendix B lists the 8-bit patterns for each value between 0 and 255. Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 53 405U Radio Modem Module User Manual 1.1.7 Receive Hold-off Time PARAM = 1 1 0 1 Default = 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 A delay time may be configured such that the 405U unit will not transmit a message during the hold-off time after receiving a message. The maximum hold-off time is 255 msec. The receive hold-off time value is the 8-bit binary equivalent of the desired time in 1 msec increments. Hence for a desired hold-off time of 10 msec, a VALUE code of ten (00001010 ) is entered. For the maximum time of 255 msec, a VALUE code of 255 (11111111) is entered. The default tail time is 20 msec. Appendix B lists the 8-bit patterns for each value between 0 and 255. 1.1.8 Character Type PARAM = 1 0 0 1 Default = 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 To select or change the data character type, enter the following VALUE code. The character type should match the type of data handled by the host device connected to that 405U module. The character type is normally the same at each 405U module in the same system. The Character Type parameter configures both the character format and the flow control on the serial port. The character format comprises the number of data bits, start bits, and parity configuration. The serial port flow control may be configured to enable or disable RTS/CTS control. In all RS-485 applications and some RS-232 applications, RTS/CTS control must be disabled. The default type is 8 data bits, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit, no parity, with disabled RTS/CTS. NOTE: These values are valid for software Versions 1.11 or later, with configurations requiring DTR Low Power Mode only. Modules requiring DTR Normal Power Mode will need to be configured using Register S9 - Character Type. Data Bits Start Bits Stop Bits Parity CTS/ RTS VALUE 8 8 8 7 7 7 8 7 7 8 8 8 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 none even odd none even odd none even odd none even odd none control enabled enabled enabled enabled enabled enabled enabled enabled enabled disabled disabled disabled disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Page 54 May 2000 Appendix A Switch Configuration Data Bits 7 7 8 7 7 Start Bits 1 1 1 1 1 Stop Bits 1 1 2 2 2 Parity CTS/ RTS VALUE even odd none even odd control disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1.1.9 Connect Update Time PARAM = 1 1 1 0 Default = 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 In controlled mode, the 405U unit will transmit a connect message if there has been no activity on the radio channel for the update time. The connect update time value is the 8-bit binary equivalent of the desired time in 0.1 minute increments. Hence for a desired hold-off time of 1 minute, a VALUE code of ten (00001010 ) is entered. For the maximum time of 25.5 minutes, a VALUE code of 255 (11111111) is entered. The default update time is 10 minutes. Appendix B lists the 8-bit patterns for each value between 0 and 255. 1.1.10 Reset to Factory Default Settings The following switch pattern will reset the configurations to the factory default values. Note that this also includes the original factory set system address. 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1.2 Transparent Mode Extending a PLC Network Enter the code with and press button until Serial RX LED indicates RED. Configuration Example Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 55 405U Radio Modem Module User Manual Unit No. 1 Configuration 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 Set the System Address Press the red button seconds - until indicates RED. for approx. 3 the Serial RX LED 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Configuration mde will automatically exit as Transparent Mode 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 Set serial data rate to 38400 bits/sec and press button until RX LED lights. 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Set radio data rate to 9600 bits/sec and press button until RX LED lights. 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Repeater Configuration 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 Set the character type to 7,1,2,E, disabled control, and press button until RX LED lights. Note that as RS485 is used, the CTS/RTS control is disabled. Set the System Address Press the red button seconds - until the RX LED comes on. for approx. 3 Page 56 May 2000 Appendix A Switch Configuration 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Unit No. 2 Configuration 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 Configuration mde will automatically exit as Transparent Mode Set Operating Mode to Transparent Repeater and press button until RX LED lights. Set the System Address Press the red button seconds - until the RX LED comes on. for approx. 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Configuration mde will automatically exit as Transparent Mode 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Set serial data rate to 9600 bits/sec and press button until RX LED lights. 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Set radio data rate to 9600 bits/sec and press button until RX LED lights. 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Set the character type to 7,1,2,E, disabled control, and press button until RX LED lights. Note that as RS485 is used, the CTS/RTS control is disabled. Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 57 405U Radio Modem Module User Manual Appendix B DECIMAL TO BINARY TABLE VALUE 8 BIT PATTERN VALUE 8 BIT PATTERN VALUE 8 BIT PATTERN 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Page 58 May 2000 Appendix B Decimal to Binary Table VALUE 8 BIT PATTERN VALUE 8 BIT PATTERN VALUE 8 BIT PATTERN 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 236 237 238 239 240 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 247 248 249 250 251 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 225 226 227 228 229 Man_905UD_2.0.doc Page 59 405U Radio Modem Module User Manual VALUE 8 BIT PATTERN VALUE 8 BIT PATTERN VALUE 8 BIT PATTERN 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 252 253 254 255 241 242 243 244 245 246 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 230 231 232 233 234 235 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 Page 60 May 2000

Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Thank you for your selection of the 905 module for your telemetry needs. We trust it will give you many years of valuable service. ATTENTION!

Incorrect termination of supply wires may cause internal damage and will void warranty. To ensure your 905 enjoys a long life, double check ALL your connections with the users manual before turning the power on. Page 2 March 2000 Contents FCC Notice:

This users manual is for the ELPRO 905 series radio telemetry module. This device complies with Part 15.247 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) 2) This device may not cause harmful interference and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device must be operated as supplied by ELPRO Technologies Pty Ltd. Any changes or modifications made to the device without the written consent of ELPRO Technologies Pty. Ltd. May void the users authority to operate the device. End user products that have this device embedded must be supplied with non-standard antenna connectors, and antennas available from vendors specified by ELPRO Technologies. Please contact ELPRO Technologies for end user antenna and connector recommendations. Notices:

Safety:

Exposure to RF energy is an important safety consideration. The FCC has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC regulated equipment as a result of its actions in General Docket 79-144 on March 13, 1996. CAUTION:

To comply with FCC RF Exposure requirements in section 1.1310 of the FCC Rules, antennas used with this device must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons to satisfy RF exposure compliance. DO NOT:

operate the transmitter when someone is within 20 cm of the antenna operate the transmitter unless all RF connectors are secure and any open connectors are properly terminated. operate the equipment near electical blasting caps or in an explosive atmosphere All equipment must be properly grounded for safe operations. All equipment should be serviced only by a qualified technician. man_905_2.0.doc Page 3 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual How to Use This Manual To receive the maximum benefit from your 905 product, please read the Introduction, Installation and Operation chapters of this manual thoroughly before putting the 905 to work. Chapter Four Configuration explains how to configure the modules using the Configuration Software available. For configuration using the on-board switches, refer to the separate 905 Switch Configuration Manual. Chapter Five Specifications details the features of the product and lists the standards to which the product is approved. Chapter Six Troubleshooting will help if your system has problems and Chapter Seven specifies the Warranty and Service conditions. The foldout sheet 905 Installation Guide is an installation drawing appropriate for most applications. Warning !

1. For 905U modules, a radio licence is not required in most countries, provided the module is installed using the aerial and equipment configuration described in the 905 Installation Guide. Check with your local 905 distributor for further information on regulations. 2. 3. 4. 5. For 905U modules, operation is authorised by the radio frequency regulatory authority in your country on a non-protection basis. Although all care is taken in the design of these units, there is no responsibility taken for sources of external interference. The 905 intelligent communications protocol aims to correct communication errors due to interference and to retransmit the required output conditions regularly. However some delay in the operation of outputs may occur during periods of interference. Systems should be designed to be tolerant of these delays. To avoid the risk of electrocution, the aerial, aerial cable, serial cables and all terminals of the 905 module should be electrically protected. To provide maximum surge and lightning protection, the module should be connected to a suitable earth and the aerial, aerial cable, serial cables and the module should be installed as recommended in the Installation Guide. To avoid accidents during maintenance or adjustment of remotely controlled equipment, all equipment should be first disconnected from the 905 module during these adjustments. Equipment should carry clear markings to indicate remote or automatic operation. E.g.

"This equipment is remotely controlled and may start without warning. Isolate at the switchboard before attempting adjustments."

The 905 module is not suitable for use in explosive environments without additional protection. Page 4 March 2000 Contents CONTENTS CHAPTER ONE INTRODUCTION.....................................................................................................................................7 1.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................................7 CHAPTER TWO INSTALLATION................................................................................................................................... 10 2.4 2.3 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................................................10 2.2 AERIAL INSTALLATION (ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED.U UNITS ONLY) ...............................................10 Dipole aerial................................................................................................................................................ 11 Three element Yagi aerial......................................................................................................................... 12 Collinear (3dB) aerial............................................................................................................................... 13 POWER SUPPLY.......................................................................................................................................................13 AC Supply..................................................................................................................................................... 14 DC Supply .................................................................................................................................................... 14 Solar Supply ................................................................................................................................................ 15 Multiple Modules........................................................................................................................................ 15 24V Regulated Supply ............................................................................................................................... 16 INPUT / OUTPUT .....................................................................................................................................................16 Digital Inputs (Error! Bookmark not defined.-1 and Error! Bookmark not defined.-2)............... 16 2.4.1 Digital Outputs (Error! Bookmark not defined.-1).............................................................................. 17 2.4.2 Digital Outputs (Error! Bookmark not defined.-2 and Error! Bookmark not defined.-3)............ 19 2.4.3 Analogue Inputs (Error! Bookmark not defined.-1 and Error! Bookmark not defined.-2).......... 19 2.4.4 Analogue Outputs (Error! Bookmark not defined.-1 and Error! Bookmark not defined.-3)....... 20 2.4.5 Pulse Input (Error! Bookmark not defined.-1)..................................................................................... 20 2.4.6 Pulse Inputs (Error! Bookmark not defined.-2)................................................................................... 20 2.4.7 Pulse Output (Error! Bookmark not defined.-1)................................................................................... 21 2.4.8 2.4.9 Pulse Output (Error! Bookmark not defined.-3)................................................................................... 21 2.4.10 RS232 Serial Port....................................................................................................................................... 21 2.4.11 RS485 Serial Port....................................................................................................................................... 22 CHAPTER THREE............................................................................................................................................. OPERATION 25 3.1 3.2 POWER-UP AND NORMAL OPERATION...............................................................................................................25 Communications......................................................................................................................................... 25 Change of state conditions....................................................................................................................... 27 Analogue Set-points................................................................................................................................... 29 Start-up Poll ................................................................................................................................................ 30 Communications Failure (CF)................................................................................................................. 30 Resetting Outputs........................................................................................................................................ 30 SYSTEM DESIGN TIPS.............................................................................................................................................30 System Dynamics......................................................................................................................................... 30 Radio Channel Capacity........................................................................................................................... 31 Radio Path Reliability............................................................................................................................... 31 Design for Failures..................................................................................................................................... 32 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4 3.1.5 3.1.6 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 CHAPTER FOUR.....................................................................................................................................CONFIGURATION 33 4.1 4.2 4.3 INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................................................33 EASY CONFIGURATION USING DEFAULT SETTINGS.........................................................................................34 ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED. CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE ...............................................................36 Hardware Requirements............................................................................................................................ 36 4.3.1 Installation................................................................................................................................................... 37 4.3.2 4.3.3 Software Operation .................................................................................................................................... 37 4.3.4 Changing User Options.................................................................................................................................. 41 4.3.5 Programming / Downloading Configuration........................................................................................ 43 man_905_2.0.doc Page 5 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual CHAPTER FIVE SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................................................................ 45 CHAPTER SIX..................................................................................................................................TROUBLESHOOTING 49 6.1 DIAGNOSTICS CHART .............................................................................................................................................49 6.2 SELF TEST FUNCTIONS..........................................................................................................................................49 Input to Output Reflection (105-1 only)................................................................................................ 49 Radio Testing using Tone Reversals ....................................................................................................... 50 Diagnostics menu........................................................................................................................................ 50 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 CHAPTER SEVEN......................................................................................................................WARRANTY & SERVICE 56 APPENDIX A SYSTEM EXAMPLE................................................................................................................................... 57 Page 6 March 2000 Chapter One Introduction Chapter One INTRODUCTION 1.1 General The 905 range of telemetry modules has been designed to provide standard off-the-shelf telemetry functions, for an economical price. Telemetry is the transmission of signals over a long distance via a medium such as radio or twisted-pair wire. Although the 905 is intended to be simple in its application, it also provides many sophisticated features. This manual should be read carefully to ensure that the modules are configured and installed to give reliable performance. The unit can monitor and control the following types of signals:

Digital on/off signals Example outputs - motor run, siren on Example inputs - motor fault, tank overflow, intruder alarm Analogue continuously variable signals (0-20mA) Example outputs - tank level indication, required motor speed Example inputs - measured tank level, actual motor speed Pulse frequency signals Examples - electricity metering, fluid flow Internal Status signals Examples - analogue battery voltage, power status, solar panel status and low battery status. The unit will monitor the input signals and transmit the signal information by radio or RS485 twisted pair to another 905 module. At the remote unit, the signals will be reproduced as digital, analogue or pulse output signals. The 905 also provides analogue set points, so that a digital output may be configured to turn on and off depending on the value of an analogue input. The pulse I/O transmits an accumulated value and the pulses are reliably recreated at the remote unit regardless of missed transmissions. The actual pulse rate is also calculated and is available as a remote analogue output. This manual covers the 905U and 105S modules. We have provided a summary on all products available in the 905 telemetry range, below. 905U-1, 905U-2 and 905U-3 modules have UHF radio and serial communications. The modules differ only in their input/output (I/O) design, and are compatible, i.e. they can be used to communicate signals to each other in the same network. 105S-1, 105S-2 and 105S-3 modules have only serial communications. All other specifications are as per the 905U-1, 2 & 3 modules. The 105S modules are compatible with 905U modules. 105M-1, 105M-2 and 105M-3 modules are for interfacing to MAP27 trunked radio systems. man_905_2.0.doc Page 7 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual These modules can transmit I/O messages hundreds of kilometres via the trunked radio system. 105M-1, 2 and 3 modules differ only in their input/output (I/O) design, and can interface to 105U and 105S modules. For more information, refer to the 105M User Manual. The 905U-C module provides an interface between host devices such as PLCs or SCADA computers, and a radio telemetry system comprising 905U and 105S radio telemetry modules. The 905U-C allows 905U/105S modules to act as remote wireless I/O for the host devices. For more information, refer to the 905U-C User Manual. Product naming convention:

1 0 5 a - x where a is:

U = UHF radio + RS232/RS485 serial S = RS232/RS485 serial only M = MAP27 trunked radio interface and x is:

1 = Input / Output module 2 = Input module ( includes one output) 3 = Output module C= Interface module 905U-1 105S-1 905U-2 105S-2 905U-3 105S-3

Radio Serial Digital Inputs (DI) Digital Outputs (DO) Analogue Inputs (AI) Analogue Outputs (AO) 4 4 (relay) 2 (4-20mA) 2 (4-20mA) 4 1 (FET) 6 (0-20mA) Pulse Inputs (PI) 1 (100Hz) 4 (1x1KHz, 3x100Hz) Pulse Outputs (PO) 1 (100Hz) Comments PI is DI 1. PO is separate to DO. PIs are the same as POs are the same as DIs. DOs (DO 1-4). The module includes power supply, microprocessor controller, input/output circuits, RS485/232 serial port, and a UHF radio transceiver - no external electronics are required. The 905U version has both radio and serial port communications. The 105S version does not have a radio and has only serial communications. The 905U radio frequency has been selected to meet the requirements Page 8 March 2000 8 (FET) 8 (0-20mA) 4 (100 Hz) Chapter One Introduction of unlicensed operation for remote monitoring and control of equipment. That is, a radio licence is not required for the 905 modules in many countries. See Chapter Five Specifications for details. Input signals connected to a 905 module are transmitted to another 905 module and appear as output signals. These input signals may also be configured to appear as inverted signals on the output. A transmission occurs whenever a "change-of-state" occurs on an input signal. A "change-

of-state" of a digital or digital internal input is a change from "off" to "on" or vice-versa. A "change-

of-state" for an analogue input, internal analogue input or pulse input rate is a change in value of the signal of 3% (configurable from 0.8 to 50 %). In addition to change-of-state messages, update messages are automatically transmitted on a regular basis. The time period may be configured by the user for each input. This update ensures the integrity of the system. Pulse inputs are accumulated as a pulse count and the accumulated pulse count is transmitted regularly according to the configured update time. The 905 modules transmit the input/output data as a data frame using radio or serial RS485 as the communications medium. The data frame includes the "address" of the transmitting 905 module and the receiving 905 module, so that each transmitted message is acted on only by the correct receiving unit. Each transmitted message also includes error checking to ensure that no corruption of the data frame has occurred due to noise or interference. The 905 module with the correct receiving

"address" will acknowledge the message with a return transmission. If the original module does not receive a correct acknowledgement to a transmission, it will retry up to five times before setting the communications fail status of that path. In critical paths, this status can be reflected on an output on the module for alert purposes. The module will continue to try to establish communications and retry, if required, each time an update or change-of-state occurs. A 905 telemetry system may be a complex network or a simple pair of modules. An easy-to-use configuration procedure allows the user to specify any output destination for each input. The maximum number of modules in one system is 95 modules communicating by radio. Each of these modules may have up to 31 other modules connected by RS485 twisted pair. Modules may communicate by radio only, by RS485 only or by both RS485 and radio. Any input signal at any module may be configured to appear at any output on any module in the entire system. Modules can be used as repeaters to re-transmit messages on to the destination module. Repeaters can repeat messages on the radio channel, or from the radio channel to the serial channel (and serial to radio). Up to five repeater addresses may be configured for each input-to-output link. The units may be configured using switches under the plastic cover on the front of the unit or by using a PC connected to the RS232 port. The default configuration is defined in Section 4.2 Easy Configuration Using Default Settings, and software configuration is defined in Section 4.2 905 Configuration Software. Several standard configurations are also available. These are described in the separate 905 Switch Configuration Manual, available from your 905 distributor. man_905_2.0.doc Page 9 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Chapter Two INSTALLATION 2.1 General The 905 module is housed in a rugged aluminium case, suitable for DIN-rail mounting. Terminals are suitable for cables up to 2.5 sqmm in size. Normal 110/220/240V mains supply should not be connected to any input terminal of the 905 module. Refer to Section 2.3 Power Supply. Before installing a new system, it is preferable to bench test the complete system. Configuration problems are easier to recognise when the system units are adjacent. Following installation, the most common problem is poor communications on the radio channel or the serial channel. For radio modules, problems are caused by incorrectly installed aerials, or radio interference on the same channel, or the radio path being inadequate. If the radio path is a problem (i.e. path too long, or obstructions in the way), then higher performance aerials or a higher mounting point for the aerial may fix the problem. Alternately, use an intermediate 905 module as a repeater. For serial modules, poorly installed serial cable, or interference on the serial cable is a common problem. The foldout sheet 905 Installation Guide provides an installation drawing appropriate to most applications. Further information is detailed below. Each 905 module should be effectively earthed via a "GND" terminal on the 905 module - this is to ensure that the surge protection circuits inside the 905 module are effective. 2.2 Aerial Installation (905U units only) The 905 module will operate reliably over large distances. The distance which may be reliably achieved will vary with each application - depending on the type and location of aerials, the degree of radio interference, and obstructions (such as hills or trees) to the radio path. See the 905 Installation Guide for expected ranges in your country. Where it is not possible to achieve reliable communications between two 905 modules, then a third 905 module may be used to receive the message and re-transmit it. This module is referred to as a repeater. This module may also have input/output (I/O) signals connected to it and form part of the I/O network - refer to Chapter 4 Configuration of this manual. An aerial must be connected to each 905 module using the BNC female connector which protrudes though one of the end plates. To achieve the maximum transmission distance, the aerials should be raised above intermediate obstructions so the radio path is true line of sight. Because of the curvature of the earth, the aerials will need to be elevated at least 5 metres above ground for paths greater than 5 km (3 miles). For short distances, the modules will operate reliably with some obstruction of the radio path. Page 10 March 2000 Chapter Two Installation Obstructions which are close to either aerial will have more of a blocking affect than obstructions in the middle of the radio path. For example, a group of trees around the aerial is a large obstruction, and the aerial should be raised above the trees. However if there is at least 100 metres of clear path before a group of trees, the trees will have little affect on the radio path. An aerial should be connected to the module via 50 ohm coaxial cable (eg RG58 or RG213) terminated with a male BNC connector. The higher the aerial is mounted, the greater the transmission range will be, however as the length of coaxial cable increases so do cable losses. For use on unlicensed frequency channels, there are several types of aerials suitable for use. It is important aerial are chosen carefully to avoid contravening the maximum power limit on the unlicensed channel - if in doubt refer to an authorised service provider. Connections between the aerial and coaxial cable should be carefully taped to prevent ingress of moisture. Moisture ingress in the coaxial cable is a common cause for problems with radio systems, as it greatly increases the radio losses. We recommend that the connection be taped, firstly with a layer of PVC Tape, then with a vulcanising tape such as 3M 23 tape, and finally with another layer of PVC UV Stabilised insulating tape. The first layer of tape allows the joint to be easily inspected when trouble shooting as the vulcanising seal can be easily removed. Where aerials are mounted on elevated masts, the masts should be effectively earthed to avoid lightning surges. Although the 905 module is fitted with surge protection, additional surge suppression devices are recommended if lightning surge problems are experienced. If the aerial is not already shielded from lightning strike by an adjacent earthed structure, a lightning rod may be installed above the aerial to provide shielding. 2.2.1 Dipole aerial. A unity gain dipole is the normal aerial for use on unlicensed channels. As it does not provide any gain, then the power transmitted from the aerial will be the same as the power out of the module, and hence will not exceed the permitted power of the unlicensed channel. For marginal radio paths, the following lengths are the recommended maximum for the coaxial cable to the dipole aerial. RG58 -10 metres RG213 - 20 metres. Note that this applies to marginal paths only - if the radio path has a strong radio signal, then longer lengths of cable ( and hence more cable loss) can be tolerated. If more than 20 metres of cable is required for a marginal path installation, then a low loss cable such as 10D-FB, or a higher gain aerial should be used. Dipole aerials should be mounted vertically, at least 1 metre away from a wall or mast. man_905_2.0.doc Page 11 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual 2.2.2 Three element Yagi aerial. A 3 element Yagi aerial provides approx 4 dB of gain. This may be used to compensate for coaxial cable loss for installations with marginal radio path. Note that these aerials should not be used if the coaxial cable lengths are less than the following minimum lengths, otherwise the power transmitted from the aerial will exceed the power permitted for the unlicensed channel. RG58 10 metres RG213 20 metres. Yagi aerials are directional. That is, they have positive gain to the front of the aerial, but negative gain in other directions. Hence Yagi aerials should be installed with the central beam horizontal and must be pointed exactly in the direction of transmission to benefit from the gain of the aerial. Also note that Yagi aerials normally have a drain hole on the folded element - the drain hole should be located on the bottom of the installed aerial. The Yagi aerials may be installed with the elements in a vertical plane (vertically polarised) or in a horizontal plane (horizontally polarised). For a two station installation, with both modules using Yagi aerials, horizontal polarisation is recommended. If there are more than two stations transmitting to a common station, then the Yagi aerials should have vertical polarisation, and the common (or central station should have a dipole or collinear (non-directional) aerial. Page 12 March 2000 Chapter Two Installation 2.2.3 Collinear (3dB) aerial. A 3dB collinear aerial may be used in the same way as a 3 element Yagi to compensate for the losses in long lengths of coaxial cable. This type of aerial is generally used at a central site with more than one remote site or at a repeater site. The collinear aerial looks similar to the dipole, except that it is longer. 2.3 Power Supply The 905 power supply is a switch-mode design which will accept either AC or DC supply. The 905 module may also be powered from a solar panel without an external solar regulator. The 905 module accepts supply voltages in the following ranges :

12 - 24 volts AC RMS or 15 - 30 volts DC at the supply terminals, or 10.8 -15 volts DC at the battery terminals. man_905_2.0.doc Page 13 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual 2.3.1 AC Supply The AC supply is connected to the "SUP1" and "SUP2" terminals as shown below.

The AC supply should be "floating" relative to earth. A 220-240/16 VAC mains "plug-pack" is available for mains applications. 2.3.2 DC Supply For DC supplies, the positive lead is connected to "SUP1" and the negative to "GND". The positive side of the supply must not be connected to earth. The DC supply may be a floating supply or negatively grounded.

The 905 module may also be powered from an external 11 - 15 VDC battery supply without the need for a "normal" supply connected to "SUP1". This external battery supply is connected to

"BAT+" and "GND" terminals. The positive lead of the external supply should be protected by a 2A fuse. Upon failure of the normal supply, the 905 module may continue to operate for several hours from a backup battery. The 905 module includes battery charging circuits for charging up to a 12 AHr sealed lead acid battery. The battery is connected to the "BAT+" (positive) and "GND" (negative) terminals. The positive lead from the battery should be protected with a 2A fuse, installed as near to the battery terminal as possible. On return of main supply, the unit will switch back to mains operation, and recharge the battery. To provide adequate current to recharge the backup battery, an AC supply of 15V minimum or a DC supply of 17V minimum must be used. Typically, a 6 AHr battery will supply the 905 for 1 - 3 days, depending on I/O loads. Page 14 March 2000 Chapter Two Installation 2.3.3 Solar Supply The 905 power supply also includes a 12 V solar regulator for connecting 12V solar panels of up to 30W, and solar batteries of up to 100AHr. The unit may not be powered from a solar panel without a battery. An 18W solar panel is sufficient for most solar applications. The size of the solar battery required depends on the I/O used. Batteries are sized for a number of sunless days with 50%

battery capacity remaining as follows:

No. of sunless days = Battery capacity (AHr) x 0.5 Module load (A) x 1.2 x 24 The Module load depends on the I/O connected and can be calculated as follows:

Module Load(A) = 0.07 + (0.01 x No. of DIs) + (0.025 x No. of DOs)

+ (2 x Analogue loop load). The analogue loop load is the total signal current for the AIs and AOs which are powered from the internal 24V supply. Externally powered loops are not included in this. The solar panel is connected to the "SOL" (positive) and "GND" (negative) terminals and the battery connected to the "BAT+" (positive) and "GND" (negative) terminals. Solar panels must be installed and connected as per the panel manufacturer's instructions. The positive lead of the battery should be protected by a 2A fuse installed as near as possible to the battery terminal. Where a solar panel larger than 30W is required, an external solar regulator should be used. 2.3.4 Multiple Modules Where more than one module is installed at the one location, a shared power supply and battery may be used, provided the total load does not exceed the power supply. man_905_2.0.doc Page 15 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual The internal power supply of the 905 module can supply a maximum 12V load of 700mA. In order to achieve this, the input power supply must be above 15VAC or 17VDC. Using these figures, it can be determined whether there is enough supply for more than one module - allow 100mA for recharging a battery. For example, assume there is a 905U-01 module and a 105S-01 module at the same location. The total I/O at the location is 3 analogue inputs, 6 digital inputs and 4 digital outputs. The total load will be :-

TYPE OF LOAD LOAD mA 905U-01 quiescent 105S-01 quiescent 6 DI @ 10 mA 3 AI @ 20mA x 2 4 DO @ 25mA Battery charging TOTAL 70 45 60 120 100 100 495 So both modules could be powered from one power supply and one battery, provided the external supply voltage is more than 15VAC or 17VDC. 2.3.5 24V Regulated Supply Each 905 module provides a 24V DC regulated supply for analogue loop power. The supply is rated at 150mA, and should only be used for analogue loops. 2.4 Input / Output 2.4.1 Digital Inputs (905-1 and 905-2) The 905-1 and 905-2 modules each provide four digital inputs with 5000 volt opto-isolation, Page 16 March 2000 Chapter Two Installation suitable for voltage free contacts (such as mechanical switches) or NPN transistor devices (such as electronic proximity switches). Contact wetting current of approximately 5mA is provided to maintain reliable operation of driving relays. Each digital input is connected between the appropriate "DI" terminal and common "COM". Each digital input circuit includes a LED indicator which is lit when the digital input is active, that is, when the input circuit is closed. Provided the resistance of the switching device is less than 200 ohms, the device will be able to activate the digital input. For pulse inputs, refer to Section 2.4.6. 2.4.2 Digital Outputs (905-1) The 905-1 module provides four normally open voltage-free relay contacts, rated at AC3 250V/2A, 120V/5A ; AC1 - 250V/5A ; DC - 30V/2A, 20V/5A. These outputs may be used to directly control low-powered equipment, or to power larger relays for higher powered equipment. When driving inductive loads such as AC relays, good installation should include capacitors (e.g. 10nf 250V) across the external circuit to prevent arcing across the relay contacts. For DC inductive loads, flyback diodes should be used to drive DC relays. Digital outputs may be configured to individually turn off if no command message is received to that man_905_2.0.doc Page 17 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual output for a certain period. This feature provides an intelligent watch dog for each output, so that a communications failure at a transmitting site causes the output to revert to a known state. See section 4.4 Changing User Options for further details. The output circuit is connected to the appropriate pair of "DO" terminals. Each digital output circuit includes a LED indicator which is lit when the digital output is active. Page 18 March 2000 Chapter Two Installation 2.4.3 Digital Outputs (905-2 and 905-3) The digital outputs on the 905-2 and 905-3 modules are transistor switched DC signals, FET output to common rated at 30VDC 500 mA. The 905-2 provides one digital output and the 905-

3 provides eight digital outputs. The first four DOs on the 905-3 module are also the pulse outputs

- that is, the first four DO's can be either digital outputs or pulse outputs. The function of each of these outputs may be configured individually. For a description of pulse outputs, refer to Section 2.4.7. Digital outputs may be configured to individually turn off if no command message is received to that output for a certain period. This feature provides an intelligent watch dog for each output, so that a communications failure at a transmitting site causes the output to revert to a known state. See Chapter 4 Configuration for further details. The output circuit is connected to the appropriate pair of "DO" terminals. Each digital output circuit includes a LED indicator which is lit when the digital output is active. 2.4.4 Analogue Inputs (905-1 and 905-2) The 905-1 module provides two 4 - 20 mA DC analogue inputs for connecting to instrument transducers such as level, moisture, pressure transducers, etc. The 905-2 module provides six 0 -

20 mA DC analogue inputs. Note that the inputs on the 905-2 module will measure down to 0mA, so they can also be used for zero based signals such as 0 - 10 mA. Each analogue input has a positive and negative terminal, and may be placed at any point in the current loop, as long as neither input rises above the 24 volt supply level. Each input has a loop resistance of less than 250 ohms and zener diode protection is provided against over-voltage and reverse voltage, however additional protection may be required in high voltage or noisy environments. A 24VDC supply is available on the 905 module for powering the analogue transducer loops. In this case, the analogue loop should be connected between a "AI 1-" terminal and "COM" ( for the first analogue input) or "AI 2-" ( for the second analogue input), and so on for other inputs. The positive terminal ("AI 1+" or "AI 2+", etc) should be connected to "+24V". man_905_2.0.doc Page 19 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Externally powered loops may be connected by connecting the input between "AI 1+" and AI 1-

for analogue input 1 or "AI 2+" and AI 2- for analogue input 2, and so on for other inputs. Analogue Input 1 "AI 1+" may also be configured to control a high/low analogue set-point. See Chapter 4 Configuration for further details. Common mode voltage may be -0.5V to 27V. Shielded cable is recommended for analogue I/O loops to minimise induced noise and Radio Frequency Interference (RFI). The shield of the cable should be connected to earth at one of the cable only. The use of shielded wiring inside an enclosure containing a 905 module is also recommended. 2.4.5 Analogue Outputs (905-1 and 905-3) The 905-1 module provides two 4 - 20 mA DC analogue outputs for connecting to instrument indicators for the display of remote analogue measurements. The 905-3 module provides eight 0 -

20 mA DC analogue outputs. Each analogue output is a "sink" to common.

A 24VDC supply is available on the 905 module for powering the analogue output loop (max external loop resistance 1000 ohms). In this case, the analogue loop is connected between a "+24V"

terminal and "AO 1" ( for the first analogue output) or "AO 2" (for the second analogue output), and so on for the other output signals. Externally powered loops to 27 VDC may be connected by connecting the output between the

"AO terminal (positive) and the "COM" terminal (negative). Zener protection of analogue outputs provides protection against short periods of over-voltage but longer periods may result in module damage. Note that the 905 common is connected internally to ground and no other point in the analogue loop should be grounded. Analogue outputs may also be configured to individually turn off (0 mA) if no command message is received to that output for a certain period. See Chapter 4 Configuration for further details. 2.4.6 Pulse Input (905-1) For the 905-1 module, digital input 1 may be configured as a pulse input (max rate 100 Hz, min. off time 5 ms). In this mode, both the pulse rate and the pulse count are available for mapping to a remote output. The pulse rate may appear at any analogue output on the remote unit, while the pulse count can appear at a Pulse Output on another 905-1 or Digital Output on a 905-3 unit. The pulse input should be connected in the same way as a digital input. 2.4.7 Pulse Inputs (905-2) Page 20 March 2000 Chapter Two Installation For the 905-2 module, the four digital inputs (DI 1-4) may be configured as pulse inputs. The first digital/pulse input DI 1 has a maximum rate of 1000 Hz (min. off time 0.5 ms), while DI 2-4 have a maximum rate of 100 Hz (min. off time 5 ms). When using DI 1 at high pulse rates (more than 100 Hz), a divide by 10 function may be configured to reduce the pulse count at the output, as Pulse Outputs have a maximum rate of 100 Hz. For each pulse input, both the pulse rate and the pulse count are available for mapping to a remote output. The pulse rate may appear at any analogue output on the remote unit, while the pulse count can appear at a Pulse Output. The default update time for pulse counts is 1 minute. This can be changed by changing the update time configuration - refer Chapter 4 Configuration for further details. The pulse count is a 16 bit value - roll over of the count when it exceeds the maximum value is automatically handled by the 905 modules. Pulse inputs should be wired in the same way as digital inputs (see Section 2.4.1). 2.4.8 Pulse Output (905-1) A single FET output to common rated at 30VDC, 500 mA is provide for the pulse output "PO". This output accurately recreates the pulses counted at a pulse input at a 905-1 or 905-2 module. Although the count is accurately re-created, the rate of output pulses may not accurately reflect the input rate. The actual input pulse rate may be configured to appear at an analogue output if required. Note that the pulse rate and accumulated value will remain accurate even if a period of communications failure has occurred. The maximum output rate is 100 Hz. If a high speed pulse input is used (more than 100 Hz) on PI1 of a 905-2 module, the pulse input count should not be transmitted to a PO on the 905-1 or DO on the 905-3 without configuring the divide-by-10 function

(on the 905-2 module) 2.4.9 Pulse Output (905-3) The first four digital outputs on the 905-3 module may also be used as pulse outputs. The outputs are FET output to common rated at 30VDC, 500 mA. The outputs will provide a pulse signal of up to 100 Hz. The outputs accurately recreate the pulses counted at pulse inputs at a 905-1 or 905-2 module. Although the count is accurately re-created, the rate of output pulses may not accurately reflect the input rate. The actual input pulse rate may be configured to appear at an analogue output if required. Note that the pulse rate and accumulated value will remain accurate even if a period of communications failure has occurred. 2.4.10 RS232 Serial Port man_905_2.0.doc Page 21 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual The serial port is a 9 pin DB9 female and provides for connection to a terminal or to a PC for configuration, field testing and for factory testing. This port is internally shared with the RS485 -

ensure that the RS485 is disconnected before attempting to use the RS232 port. Communication is via standard RS-232 signals. The 905 is configured as DCE equipment with the pin-out detailed below. The serial port communicates at a baud rate of 9600 baud, 8 bits, no parity, one stop bit. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Name DCD RD TD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI Dirn Function Out Out In In

Out In Out

Data carrier detect - not used Transmit Data - Serial Data Input (High = 0, Low = 1) Receive Data - Serial Data Output (High = 0, Low = 1) Data Terminal Ready - not used Signal Ground Data Set Ready - not used Request to Send - not used Clear to send - not used Ring indicator - not used. An example cable drawing for connection to a laptop is detailed below:

MALE FEMALE 2.4.11 RS485 Serial Port The RS485 port provides for communication between multiple 905 units using a multi-drop cable. Up to 32 units may be connected in each multi-drop network. Each multi-drop network may have one unit providing radio communications with other units in the system. The RS485 feature allows local hubs of control to operate without occupying radio bandwidth required for communication between remotely sited units. Page 22 March 2000 Chapter Two Installation The RS485 Communications format is 9600 baud, 8 data bits, one stop bit, no parity. Note that the RS485 port is shared internally with the RS232 port - disconnect the RS232 cable after configuration is complete. man_905_2.0.doc Page 23 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual RS485 is a balanced, differential standard but it is recommended that shielded, twisted pair cable be used to interconnect modules to reduce potential Radio Frequency Interference (RFI). An RS485 network should be wired as indicated in the diagram below and terminated at each end of the network with a 120 ohm resistor.

Page 24 March 2000 Chapter Two Installation Chapter Three OPERATION 3.1 Power-up and Normal Operation When power is initially connected to the 905 module, the module will perform internal diagnostics to check its functions. The following table details the status of the indicating LEDs on the front panel under normal operating conditions. LED Indicator OK RX RX RX TX

(only on 905U units) PWR OK Condition On Occasional flash Flashes continuously On Occasional flash On Flashes every 5 seconds Meaning Normal Operation Radio Receiving, or Activity on serial ports Configuration Mode Button press when entering Configuration Mode Radio Transmitting Supply voltage available from Solar Panel or SUP1/SUP2

+24V Supply overloaded Additional LEDs provide indication of the status of digital inputs and outputs. LEDs display the status of each digital input (lit for active), and LEDs display the status of each digital output (lit for active). Other conditions indicating a fault are described in Chapter Six Troubleshooting. The 905 module monitors the power supply and provides status of supply failure and battery low voltage for "mapping" to one of the module's own outputs or transmitting to a remote output. When the 905 module is powered from a normal supply (i.e. via either of the SUP terminals), the PWR LED indicator is lit. When the 905 modules is powered from a solar panel and battery, the PWR LED indicator is lit only when the charge current is available (i.e. when the solar panel is receiving light). In the event of excessively low battery voltage (10.8V), the OK LED will go off, the unit will automatically set all outputs off, and disable the +24V analogue loop supply. the OK LED will turn on again after the battery voltage exceeds 11.3V. This enables installations to be configured so that the battery current drain is minimised in the event of extended mains failure, reducing the possibility of deep discharge of batteries. 3.1.1 Communications If transmissions are not successful, then the 905 module will re-try up to four times at random intervals to transmit the message. If communications is still not successful, the Comms Fail internal status will be set. In the default configuration, this will have no consequence and the 905 module will man_905_2.0.doc Page 25 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual continue to attempt to transmit to the remote module every ten minutes. For critical applications, this status can be configured to be reflected to an output on the module for alert purposes. The outputs on the module may also be configured to reset after a specified timeout (digital outputs reset to off, analogue outputs reset to 0 mA) allowing the system to turn off in a controlled manner e.g. a pump will never be left running because of a system failure. Example of Successful Communications Local Unit Listen to ensure channel is clear If clear, transmit message TX LED flashes if radio RX LED flashes if RS485 RX LED flashes Acknowledgement received okay -

communication complete Example of unsuccessful communications Local Unit Listen to ensure channel is clear If clear, transmit message TX LED flashes if radio RX LED flashes if RS485 No acknowledgement received Retry up to four times Still no acknowledgement

(4) Comms fail status to remote unit set If status is mapped to an output, set output Remote Unit Receive message RX LED flashes Check message for integrity If message okay, transmit it back as acknowledgement TX LED flashes if radio RX LED flashes if RS485 Outputs updated as per message received. Remote Unit Receive message RX LED flashes Check message for integrity Message corrupted nothing

- do If no update received for an output within watchdog timeout, check to see if the output is configured to reset Reset outputs if configured Page 26 March 2000 Chapter Three Operation Repeaters can be used in a system to increase range. Each 905U unit can be configured to act as a repeater. When configuring an input to be mapped to an output, the communications path to the output unit, including the repeater addresses is specified. The 905U acts as a digital repeater, that is, the signal is decoded and then retransmitted as new. Example Repeater Communications Unit A DI 1 mapped to Unit D DO1 via Units B & C Unit A DI 1 is turned on Transmit Receive Acknowledge Unit B Repeater Unit C Repeater Unit D Receive Transmit on with Acknowledge Receive Acknowledge Receive Transmit on with Acknowledge Receive Acknowledge Receive Transmit acknowledge DO 1 is turned on 3.1.2 Change of state conditions The 905 module transmits a data message whenever it detects a "change-of-state" on one of its input signals. A "change-of-state" of a digital or digital internal input is a change from "off" to "on" or vice-

versa provided the change is sustained for 0.5 second (i.e. 0.5 second debounce). In addition to "change-of-state" transmissions, each module will transmit the status of each input to its corresponding output every ten minutes (configurable). These updates mean that the outputs are set to the current input values regularly, even where no change-of-state has occurred. These update transmissions increase the accuracy of the output and give extra system reliability. Analogue Change-of-state A "change-of-state" for an analogue input, battery voltage or pulse input rate is a change in value of the signal of 3% (configurable) since the last transmission. Note that the sensitivity of 3% refers to 3% of the analogue range, not 3% of the instantaneous analogue value. That is, if an analogue input changes from 64% (14.24 mA) to 67% (14.72 mA), a "change-of-state" will be detected. This change-of-state sensitivity is configurable between 0.8% and 50%. Analogue inputs are digitally filtered to prevent multiple transmissions on continually varying or

"noisy" signals. The input is filtered with a 1 second time constant and a 1 second debounce. The analogue outputs are filtered with a 1 second time constant. An example explaining the interaction of these figures is shown below. In general, the following may be used as a rule of thumb for man_905_2.0.doc Page 27 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual calculating the appropriate sensitivity required for a given application:

Instantaneous change of 2 x sensitivity on input Instantaneous change of 10 x sensitivity on input The analogue inputs have 15 bit resolution and 0.016mA accuracy. An example of an analogue input and how the output follows it is shown below:

3 second output response 5 second output response Pulse input change of state Pulse input counts do not use change-of-state transmissions. Instead, accumulated pulse input counts are transmitted at set intervals. The default period is 1 minute and is configurable. Note that the pulse outputs are re-created from the accumulated pulse count. If a transmission is missed, the pulse output will still be re-created when the next accumulated value is transmitted. This ensures that no pulses are lost due to communications failures. The following diagram shows how pulse inputs are re-created as pulse outputs. For pulse outputs, the 905 module keeps two counters in memory - the pulse input count received from the remote 905 module, and the count of output pulses. When the 905 receives an update of the input pulse count, it will output pulses until the output pulse count is the same as the input pulse count. The Page 28 March 2000 Chapter Three Operation output pulse will be output evenly over the pulse output update time which is configured in the module. For example, assume that 905 module receives a pulse input update message from the remote 905 module, and the difference between the pulse input count and the pulse output count is 12 pulses. The 905 will then output the 12 pulses evenly over the next minute (if the pulse output update time is 1 minute). The default values for the pulse input update time and pulse output update time is 1 minute. In this case, the output pulses are effectively 1 minute behind the input pulses. These update times may be changed by the user. The pulse output update time should not be set to be more than the pulse input update time. Note that the maximum pulse rate for both inputs and outputs is 100Hz. PI update time Input Pulses Output Pulses Time Time PO update time As well as accumulating the pulse input, the 905 module will also calculate the rate of pulses. Pulse rates are treated as an internal analogue input and are configured with analogue sensitivities for change-of-state transmissions. The maximum pulse rate corresponding to 20mA output may be configured by the user. 3.1.3 Analogue Set-points On 905-1 modules, the AI 1 input may be used to trigger the analogue set-point status. High set point and low set point levels are configurable. This set-point status turns ON when the analogue input moves below the low level, and turns OFF when it moves above the high level. The high level must always be greater than, or equal to, the low level set point. This set-point status may be mapped (inverted, if required) to any output in the network. The set-point status is effectively an internal digital input. On 905-2 modules, each analogue input has set-point values for controlling digital outputs. The man_905_2.0.doc Page 29 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual set-point operation works as for the 905-1 module. 3.1.4 Start-up Poll After a 905 module has completed its initial diagnostics following power up, it will transmit update messages to remote modules based on the values of the modules inputs. The modules outputs will remain in the reset/off/zero condition until it receives update or change-of-state messages from the remote modules. The 905 module can transmit a special start-up poll message to another module. The remote module will then immediately send update messages to this module such that its outputs can be set to the correct value. Start-up polls will only occur if they are configured. It is necessary to configure a start-up poll to each remote module which controls the modules outputs. For further information, refer to Chapter 4 Configuration. 3.1.5 Communications Failure (CF) The internal communications failure (CF) status is set if a module does not receive an acknowledgement message after five attempts at transmitting a message. The CF status may be configured to set a local digital output for an external alarm. Although the CF status can set an output, it will not reset the output. That is, once communications is re-established (and the CF status is reset), the output will stay on. The Reset Output feature

(see below) is used to reset the output. The output will reset only when no communications failures occur within the configured Reset Output Time for the output that CF status is mapped to. Note that if the reset output time is not enabled, the CF status will remain set forever, once an unsuccessful transmission occurs. See Chapter 4 Configuration for further details. 3.1.6 Resetting Outputs Each digital and analogue output may be individually configured to reset if that output has not received a change-of-state or an update message within a certain time period. Generally this time is set to twice the update period, so at least one update can be missed before an output is reset. In most cases it is desirable to reset outputs which are controlling equipment if there is a system failure, however alarm or indication outputs are not reset so the last valid indication remains shown. See Chapter 4 Configuration for further details. 3.2 System Design Tips The following tips will help to ensure that your system operates reliably. 3.2.1 System Dynamics It is important to be aware of the dynamics of the 905 system. Digital inputs have a minimum debounce delay of 0.5 sec - that is, a change message will not be sent for 0.5 sec after a change Page 30 March 2000 Chapter Three Operation has occurred. Analogue inputs and outputs have time delays of 1 to 2 seconds. Messages transmitted via serial link are received in less than 20 mSec, however a message sent by radio takes approx 100 mSec. These delays are not significant is most applications, however if your application requires faster responses, then the above delays need to be considered. 3.2.2 Radio Channel Capacity Messages sent on a cable link are much faster than on a radio channel, and the capacity of the radio channel must be considered when designing a system. This becomes more important as the I/O size of a system increases. The 905 modules are designed to provide real-time operation. When an input signal changes, a change message is sent to change the output. The system does not require continuous messages to provide fast operation (as in a polling system). Update messages are intended to check the integrity of the system, not to provide fast operation. Update times should be selected based on this principle. The default update time is 10 minutes - we recommend that you leave these times as 10 minutes unless particular inputs are very important and deserve a smaller update time. It is important that radio paths be reliable. For large systems, we recommend a maximum radio channel density of 100 messages per minute, including change messages and update messages. We suggest that you do not design for an average transmission rate of greater than 50 per minute - this will give a peak rate of approx 100 per minute. Note that this peak rate assumes that all radio paths are reliable - poor radio paths will require re-try transmissions and will reduce the peak channel density. If there are other users on the radio channel, then this peak figure will also decrease. The 905 modules will only transmit one message at a time. If re-tries are necessary, another message cannot start. The time between re-tries is a random time between 1 and 5 seconds. The time for five tries is between 5 and 21 seconds. Another message cannot be sent until the last one has finished. This delay will obviously have an affect on a busy system. 3.2.3 Radio Path Reliability Radio paths over short distances can operate reliably with a large amount of obstruction in the path. As the path distance increases, the amount of obstruction which can be tolerated decreases. At the maximum reliable distance, line-of-sight is required for reliable operation. If the path is over several kilometres (or miles), then the curvature of the earth is also an obstacle and must be allowed for. For example, the earth curvature over 10 km is approx 3m, requiring aerials to be elevated at least 4m to achieve line-of-sight even if the path is flat. A radio path may act reliably in good weather, but poorly in bad weather - this is called a marginal radio path. If the radio path is more than 20% of the maximum reliable distance (see Specification section for these distances), we recommend that you test the radio path before installation. Each 905U module has a radio path testing feature - refer to section 6.2 of this manual. man_905_2.0.doc Page 31 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual There are several ways of improving a marginal path :-

Relocate the aerial to a better position. If there is an obvious obstruction causing the problem, then locating the aerial to the side or higher will improve the path. If the radio path has a large distance, then increasing the height of the aerial will improve the path. Use an aerial with a higher gain. Before you do this, make sure that the radiated power from the new aerial is still within the regulations of your country. If you have a long length of coaxial cable, you can use a higher gain aerial to cancel the losses in the coaxial cable. If it is not practical to improve a marginal path, then the last method is to use another module as a repeater. A repeater does not have to be between the two modules (although often it is). If possible, use an existing module in the system which has good radio path to both modules. The repeater module can be to the side of the two modules, or even behind one of the modules, if the repeater module is installed at a high location (for example, a tower or mast). Repeater modules can have their own I/O and act as a normal 905U module in the system. 3.2.4 Design for Failures All well designed systems consider system failure. I/O systems operating on a wire link will fail eventually, and a radio system is the same. Failures could be short-term (interference on the radio channel or power supply failure) or long-term (equipment failure). The 905 modules provide the following features for system failure :-

Outputs can reset if they do not receive a message within a configured time. If an output should receive an update or change message every 10 minutes, and it has not received a message within this time, then some form of failure is likely. If the output is controlling some machinery, then it is good design to switch off this equipment until communications has been re-established. The 905 modules provide a drop outputs on comms fail time. This is a configurable time value for each output. If a message has not been received for this output within this time, then the output will reset (off, in-active, 0). We suggest that this reset time be a little more than twice the update time of the input. It is possible to miss one update message because of short-term radio interference, however if two successive update messages are missed, then long term failure is likely and the output should be reset. For example, if the input update time is 3 minutes, set the output reset time to 7 minutes. A 905 module can provide an output which activates on communication failure to another module. This can be used to provide an external alarm that there is a system fault. Page 32 March 2000 Chapter Four Configuration Chapter Four CONFIGURATION 4.1 Introduction The 905 modules may be configured by connecting a computer (PC) using the 905 Configuration Software programme. Alternatively, the module may be configured by the on-board miniature switches located under the blue cover on the front of the module. This chapter describes the default configuration of the module and using the Configuration Software Programme. For details on switch configuration, please refer to the separate 905 Switch Configuration Manual, available from 905 distributors. Each 905 module is configured with a system address and a unit address. The system address is common to every module in the same system, and is used to prevent "cross-talk" between modules in different systems. Separate networks with different system addresses may operate independently in the same area without affecting each other. The system address may be any number between 1 and 32 767. The actual value of the system address is not important, provided all modules in the same system have the same system address value. A system address of zero should not be used. Each unit must have a unique unit address within the one system. A valid unit address is 1 to 127. A network may have up to 95 individual modules communicating via radio (unit addresses 1 to 95), each with up to 31 modules communicating via RS485 (unit addresses 96 to 127). In the network, any individual input signal may be "mapped" to one or more outputs anywhere in the system. The unit address determines the method of communication to a module. Any module with a unit address between 96 and 127 will communicate by RS485 only. Other units with a unit address below 95 may communicate by radio or RS485 - the unit will determine which way to communicate depending upon the unit address of the destination module. For example, Unit 31 will talk to Unit 97 by RS485 only, but will talk to unit 59 by radio only. 105S units must always have a unit address between 96 and 127 as serial communication is the only method of communication available. A unit address of zero should not be used. The three different products in the range can be used together in the same system. Inputs to one product type can be transmitted to outputs of another product type. For example, an analogue input to a 905-2 may be transmitted to an analogue output of a 905-1 or 905-3. Repeaters may be any product type. The 905-1 and 905-2 modules require only one unit address. The 905-3 module uses two addresses, however only one unit address has to be entered. The 905-3 module requires two addresses because of the large number of output channels. If the entered" unit address is an even number, then the second address is the next number. If the "entered" address is an odd number, then the second address is the previous number. So the two addresses are two subsequent numbers, starting with an even number. If a 905-3 module is given a unit address of 10, then it will also take up the unit address 11 and will accept messages addressed to either 10 or 11. It is important to remember this when allocating unit addresses to other modules in the system. man_905_2.0.doc Page 33 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Warning - do not allocate the address number 1 to a 905-3 module. In addition to these network configurations, operational parameters called User Options may be configured to change the features of the 905 operation. These parameters may be configured using the Configuration Software of configuration switches (see 905 Switch Configuration Manual) 4.2 Easy Configuration Using Default Settings If your application requires only a single pair of 905 modules, communicating via radio or serial link, default settings may satisfy your needs. If so, no configuration is required. Essentially, all inputs at Module A are reflected at the corresponding outputs at Module B. All inputs at Module B are reflected at the corresponding outputs at Module A. For 905-1 modules, the default configuration is as follows :-

In this configuration, the PO Pulse output is inactive and no special action is taken on Comms fail, Mains fail or Battery Low. DI 1 is configured as a digital and not a pulse input. Page 34 March 2000 Chapter Four Configuration For 905-2 and 905-3 modules, the default configuration is as follows :-

The following table details the default values for User Options:

Option Update transmissions Analogue Change-of-state sensitivity Reset outputs on Comms fail Analogue Setpoints (if mapped) Pulse Output Rate Scaling

(if Pulse Rate is mapped) Digital Input Debounce Time Factory Set Value Every 10 minutes 3%

No Low Set point = 30%

High Set point = 75%

100 Hz 0.5 seconds If any of the above values are not appropriate to your system, Section 4.4 below will detail how to change one or all of the above variables. man_905_2.0.doc Page 35 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual 4.3 905 Configuration Software This chapter describes installation and operation of configuration software for the 905 radio and serial telemetry modules. Configuration software eliminates the need for configuration of the unit via the 16 DIL switches under the blue plastic plug.. This software provides all of the functions available through the switch configuration as well as additional configuration options not available through switch configuration. The configuration software runs on a conventional PC as a DOS programme. The software creates a configuration file that can be loaded into a 905 module via RS232. The configuration software also allows the configuration of a 905 module to be downloaded for display and modification. Configuration files can be saved to disk for later retrieval. Configuration of 905 modules consists of entering I/O mappings, and selecting User Options. An I/O mapping is a link between an input on the module being configured and an output on another module. A mapping has the form :-

DI3 Out2 at 4 via 3, 11 This mapping links DI3 on this module to output channel 2 on the module with address 4, and modules 3 and 11 are repeaters. Up to 32 mappings may be entered for each module. User Options may be selected to change the configuration of specific features. IBM or compatible PC (386 or higher) with MS-DOS, MS-Windows 3.1, Windows-95/98 4.3.1 Hardware Requirements 3.5" 1.44M floppy drive (for software installation) At least one serial port (preferably two serial ports to allow mouse operation). RS-232 serial cable as shown below. 905 End DB9 Male DB9 female PC End 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Required Optional Page 36 March 2000 Chapter Four Configuration 4.3.2 Installation Running from floppy disk The software may be run directly from the distribution disk. If the software is to be used in this manner, a copy of the distribution disk should be made, and the copy used to run the software. Installing to a hard disk Most users will want to install the configuration software to the hard disk of their computer. This may be simply achieved by creating a directory on the destination hard disk and copying the contents of the distribution disk to the hard disk. For example, if the destination hard disk is drive C: and the distribution floppy is in drive A: the following sequence of instructions may be used. C:> MKDIR CFG105 C:> COPY A:\*.EXE CFG105 Hints for Windows Users For slower machines, the software should be run in Full Screen and Exclusive mode under Windows. If problems are experienced, exit windows and run the program from DOS. 4.3.3 Software Operation Running from MS-DOS Start the software by entering the directory where the configuration program is stored, and entering the executable file name. For example, if the executable is stored in C:\CFG105 type the following C:\> CD CFG105 C:\CFG105> CFG105-1 To configure a 905-1 module C:\CFG105> CFG105-2 To configure a 905-2 module C:\CFG105> CFG105-3 To configure a 905-3 module and press the <ENTER> key. Running from MS-Windows Select the Run... option from the Start menu. In the Command Line Box type:

C:\CFG105\CFG105-1 To configure a 905-1 module, C:\CFG105\CFG105-2 To configure a 905-2 module, C:\CFG105\CFG105-3 To configure a 905-3 module, and press the <ENTER> key. The Initial screen will appear as below. man_905_2.0.doc Page 37 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual This screen shows the system address, unit address, a summary of all of the mappings configured, and the current file (if any) being used. To move between editing the system address, unit address, and configuration mappings, use the <TAB> key, or use the <ALT> key in conjunction with the highlighted letter. Alternatively, simply click on the appropriate section with the mouse. Changing the system address and unit address To change the system address and unit address, simply move to the appropriate box using the

<TAB> key or the <ALT> + letter keys, or mouse click, and type in a new number or use the arrow keys to edit the old number. Entering a new mapping To enter a new mapping, move to the Mappings section of the screen using the <TAB>, <ALT> +

M keys or the mouse. Hit the <INS> key or double click the left mouse button to bring up a dialogue box as shown below. Select the desired mapping type and hit the <ENTER> key or select OK to continue. Input/Output Standard mapping of an input to an output at another unit. Poll Start-up poll of a remote unit to ensure data is up to date Comms Fail Set a local output on comms fail to a remote site Page 38 March 2000 Chapter Four Configuration Changing an existing mapping Select the mapping to change using the mouse or arrow keys, and either press the <ENTER> key, or click the right mouse button. Deleting an existing mapping Select the mapping to delete using the mouse or arrow keys, and press the <DEL> key to delete the mapping. A message asks for confirmation to ensure mappings are not deleted accidentally. Configuring Input/Output mapping types On selecting an Input/Output type mapping, a dialogue box allows entry of the desired mapping. Depending on the type of unit being configured (905-1, 905-2, or 905-3), the dialogue box will vary. The following is the display for configuration of Input/Output mappings on a 905-1 module. The 905-2 module has 32 different inputs, and the 10GenericName-3 module has only 4 inputs. Item Input Output Meaning The input to be mapped. The output (usually at a remote site) at which the signal is to appear. Destination Address The address of the site where the output is to appear. Store And Forward The addresses of any intermediate repeater units needed to reach the destination address (entered in order of nearest to furthermost repeater). Invert Optional inversion of the signal (905-1 and 905-3 only). man_905_2.0.doc Page 39 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Select the desired mapping configuration, then press <ENTER> or select the OK button on the dialogue box to return to the main screen. Outputs are identified by the corresponding output name for each type of destination module. These correspond to the outputs of the various 905 modules as follows:

905-1 Output 905-2 Output 905-3 address (Even) First 905-3 address (Odd) Second Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 DOT 1 DOT 2 DOT 3 DOT 4 AOT 1 AOT 2 PULSE OUT None Configuring Start-Up Polls DOT 1 None None None None None None None DOT/PULSE 1 DOT/PULSE 2 DOT/PULSE 3 DOT/PULSE 4 DOT 5 DOT 6 DOT 7 DOT 8 AOT 1 AOT 2 AOT 3 AOT 4 AOT 5 AOT 6 AOT 7 AOT 8 When a unit is first turned on, its outputs will not be set until it receives update messages from any other units in the system which have inputs configured to appear at those outputs. To ensure that outputs are set as soon as possible after start-up the unit may be configured to Poll any other units with mappings to its outputs. This is achieved by selecting Poll from the Mapping Type dialogue box. If Poll is selected from the mapping type dialogue box, then the following dialogue box is displayed. Enter the address of the unit to poll in the Destination address section, and the addresses of any intermediate units required to reach this unit in the Store and Forward section (starting with the nearest repeater address). Configuring Comms Fail Mappings In situations where an indication of unsuccessful communication (comms) to a remote module is required, an output at the local module may be turned on in the event of unsuccessful comms. Page 40 March 2000 Chapter Four Configuration Successful comms does not turn off the output, so the Drop outputs on comms fail (Refer below) time should be set to a period similar to the update time for the remote. This allows comms fail indication to multiple remotes to be configured to appear at the same output, which acts as a general comms fail indication. Configuring a Comms Fail Address of zero causes communication failure to any destination module to be indicated on the selected output. For example, if Comms fail to unit 12 is configured to DO1, then the 905 module will set (or activate) DO1 each time communications to unit 12 is not successful. If DO1 has a Drop outputs on comms fail time configured of 10 minutes, then DO1 will reset (de-activate) 10 minutes after the last comms fail to unit 12. Enter the output at which the comms fail indication is to appear, and the address for which the comms fail should be indicated. Saving and Loading Configurations to / from Disk It is strongly recommended that the configuration for each unit in the system is saved to a backup file. In the unlikely event of unit failure, a replacement unit may be quickly configured from the saved file. When editing a configuration is complete, it may be saved to a disk file for future use, or for further editing. The File menu on the top menu bar provides access to saving and restoring configuration files. Files are stored with the default extension .905 for 905-1 configurations, extension .205 for 905-2 configurations and .305 for 905-3 configurations. Standard file dialogue boxes for Load, Save, and Save As commands provide simple file management. When a file is loaded or saved the status line at the bottom of the screen Current File changes to indicate the name of the current file. 4.3.4 Changing User Options User options allow a variety of parameters of the 905 module to be modified to suit a particular application. User Options are available through the User Options menu on the top menu bar. User options are man_905_2.0.doc Page 41 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Update Times Analogue Sensitivity Reset Output on Comms Fail Digital/Analogue Debounce (905-1 and 905-2 only) Analogue Debounce (905-2 only) Set-points (905-1 and 905-2 only) Pulse Rate Scale (905-1 and 905-2 only) Pulse Output Update (905-1 and 905-3 only) Update Times allows configuration of how frequently each configured mapping is updated

(Integrity Update). The period of update (check) transmissions may be configured individually for each input. The default period is 10 minutes for all inputs, except for pulse inputs (1 minute). Note that this is the check transmission time - updates will also be sent on any change-of-state on each input. It is important here to keep in mind the principle - Less radio traffic means better communications. Short update times should only be used in special circumstances, or when an RS-485 network is used, and the message is not transmitted over a radio link. Frequent updates from multiple units causes congestion of the radio channel, which results in increased communication failures and general performance degradation of the system. Analogue Sensitivity allows configuration of the change required in an analogue input before a Change Of State is detected, and the new analogue value is transmitted. For input signals which vary widely over a short period of time or have a normal oscillation, the analogue sensitivity should be set to an appropriately large value. This ensures that many change messages are not transmitted in too short a time. This will result in channel congestion, as described in the preceding section. Reset Output on Comms Fail allows the Comms Fail Time to be selected - this is the time for an output to reset if it has not received an update or change message. Each output on the unit, either analogue or digital, may be configured to reset (off or 0mA) when no update transmission has been received for a certain time. The default condition is zero (no reset). This option can be used to ensure that communications failure will not result in loss of control. For example, outputs connected to pumps should be configured to reset on communications failure so that the pump will turn off. If the reset time is less than the update time, then the output will reset when the reset time expires, and then set again when the update message is received. We recommend that the reset time be a little more than twice the update time. Debounce is the time which an input must stay stable before the 905 module decides that a change of state has occurred. If the input changes (say 0 0) in less than the debounce time, then the 905 module will ignore both changes. Debounce may be configured for digital inputs on the 905-1 and 905-2 modules (0.5 - 8 seconds) and the analogue inputs on the 1) and changes again (1 Page 42 March 2000 Chapter Four Configuration 905-2 module (0.5 - 8 seconds). The default value of 0.5 seconds is suitable for most applications. In applications where a digital input may turn on and off several times slowly (for example, security switches or float switches) a debounce time of up to 8 seconds may be configured. The configured debounce time has no affect on pulse inputs. Note that the analogue debounce is not configurable for the 905-1, but is configurable in the 905-2. Set-points allow a remote digital output to be turned on and off depending on the value of an analogue input. The set-point status internal input must be mapped to an output for this option to have effect. When the AI is less than the Low Set-point (LSP), the set-point status will be active

(on, 1) - when the AI is more than the High Set Point (HSP), the set-point status will be reset

(off, 0). Note that the High Set Point (HSP) must always be higher than the Low Set Point

(LSP). For the 905-1 module, only AI1 has set-point values. For 905-2 modules, all six analogue inputs have set-points. Debounce time operates on the set-point status in the same way as digital inputs. Pulse Rate Scale is used when pulse rate is mapped to an analogue output. The pulse rate scale configures the maximum expected pulse input frequency. This is the frequency for which the pulse rate input indicates the maximum value (20 mA if mapped to an analogue output). On the 905-1, the maximum value is 100 Hz. On the 105-2, the maximum value is 1000 Hz for input 1, and 100 Hz for inputs 2-4. Pulse input 1 on the 905-2 module can measure pulse signals up to 1000 Hz, however all pulse outputs have a maximum rate of only 100 Hz. For pulse inputs greater than 100 Hz, a Divide-by-

10 function should be configured. The input count is then divided by 10 before transmitting. The default is 100Hz (no divide-by-10). Where the 1000Hz option is configured, then each output pulse means 10 pulses (or 10 counts). Pulse Output Update is the time which pulses are output after a PI update is received. It should be configured to correspond to the pulse input update time for the corresponding pulse input. This ensures that the pulse output rate matches as closely as possible the pulse input rate which it is reflecting. For example, if the PI update time is 1 minute, then the PO update time should also be 1 minute. If the PI update time is changed, then the PO update time at the remote module should be also changed. The PO will still operate if the time is not changed, however pulses may be output faster or slower than the input pulses. 4.3.5 Programming / Downloading Configuration Transferring configuration to the 905 Module Once editing of the configuration is complete, the configuration must be loaded into the 905 before the new configuration takes effect. Before proceeding, close any other programmes on the PC that is using the communications port. Connect the cable from the PCs serial port to the 905 serial port. From the Communication menu, select Select Comms Port man_905_2.0.doc Page 43 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Select the appropriate serial port from the list provided (COM1 - COM4) From the Communication menu, select Program The 105 The configuration program will now attempt to download the configuration data to the 905 module. If all goes well, a Programming prompt will appear. This prompt will remain until programming of the 905 is complete. If the 905 is not correctly connected, or is not turned on, it may take up to a minute for the configuration program to stop trying to connect to the 905. Loading existing Configuration from the 905 To download the configuration from a 905 for editing or simply for checking, follow the following steps:

Connect the cable from the PCs serial port to the 905 serial port. From the Communication menu, select Select Comms Port Select the appropriate serial port from the list provided (COM1 - COM4) From the Communication menu, select Load Config from 105 The configuration program will now attempt to upload the configuration data from the 905. If all goes well, a Loading prompt will appear. This prompt will remain until loading of data from the 905 is complete. If the 905 is not correctly connected, or is not turned on, it may take up to a minute for the configuration program to stop trying to connect to the 905. Page 44 March 2000 Chapter Five Specifications Chapter Five SPECIFICATIONS General EMC approval Radio standards 105U Radio standards 905U Housing Terminal blocks LED indication Operating Temperature Power Supply Battery supply AC supply DC supply 89/336/EEC 458 MHz, 500 mW EIRP 430 - 450 Mhz, 10 - 500 mW 472 MHz, 100 mW EIRP 458 MHz, 500 mW EIRP 902 928 MHz, 1W Powder-coated, extruded aluminium Suitable for 2.5 mm2 conductors EN55022 (CISPR 22)

- CLASS B EN 50082-1 I-ETS 300 683 AS 3548 MPT 1329 UK I-ETS-300-220 AS 4268.2 AUST RFS29 NZ FCC Part 15.247 130 x 185 x 60mm DIN rail mount Removable Power supply, OK operation, digital I/O, RX and TX

-20 to 60 degrees C 11.3 - 15.0 VDC 12 - 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz Overvoltage protected 15 - 30 VDC Overvoltage and reverse voltage protected Mains supply 110-250 VAC via plug-pack transformer Battery Charging circuit Included Solar regulator Included Current Drain 70 mA quiescent for U 45 mA quiescent for S Analogue loop supply Mains fail status Battery voltage Radio Transceiver (105U) Included Monitored Monitored for 1.2-12 ahr sealed lead acid battery Direct connection of solar panel (up to 30W) and solar battery (100 Ahr)

+ 10 mA/active digital input

+ 25 mA/active digital output

+ 2 x analogue I/O loop (mA) 24V DC 150 mA transmitted to remote Can be modules As above man_905_2.0.doc Page 45 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Single channel Frequency Transmit power Spurious emissions Frequency Stability Receiver Sensitivity Signal detect / RSSI Expected line-of-sight range Aerial Connector Radio Transceiver (905U) Type Frequency Transmit power Spurious emissions Frequency Stability Receiver Sensitivity Signal detect / RSSI Expected line-of-sight range Aerial Connector Serial Ports RS232 Port synthesised 405 - 490 Mhz Adjustable RX - <-57 dBm TX - <-37 dBm

+/- 1.0 kHz 0.4uV at 12dB SINAD

-120 to -80 dBm 2 km @ 10mW EIRP 5 km @ 100mW EIRP 10 km @ 500 mW EIRP Female BNC coaxial Spread Spectrum 902 - 928 Mhz Adjustable RX - <-57 dBm TX - <-37 dBm

+/- 10 kHz 0.4uV at 12dB SINAD

-120 to -80 dBm 10 km @ 100mW EIRP 20 km @ 500 mW EIRP Female SMA Coaxial DB9 female DCE RS485 Port 2 pin terminal block Direct frequency modulation 12.5 kHz channel spacing 10 - 500 mW Range may be extended by up to 5 intermediate modules as repeaters Protected by gas discharge surge arrester Frequency Hopping 250 kHz channel spacing 100 mW 1 W Range may be extended by up to 5 intermediate modules as repeaters 9600 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit 9600 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, Typical distance 1km Update time configurable Automatic acknowledgments with up to 4 retries Data transmission Protocol - serial

- radio Communications fail status On change-of-state

+ integrity update asynchronous ARQ, with 16 bit CRC synchronous ARQ May be mapped to local or Resetting of outputs on comms fail Page 46 March 2000 Chapter Five Specifications remote output configurable Inputs and Outputs Digital Inputs Digital Outputs Digital Outputs Pulse Inputs Pulse Output 905-1 Four 105-2 Four 105-3 None 105-1 Four 105-2 One 105-3 Eight 105-1 One 105-2 Four 105-3 None 105-1 One 105-2 None 105-3 Four Analogue Inputs 105-1 Two 4-20 mA Analogue Input Setpoints 105-2 Six 0-20mA 105-3 None 105-1 AI 1 only 105-2 AI 1-6 Analogue Outputs 105-1 Two 4-20mA Opto-isolated (5000V)inputs, suitable for voltage free contacts or NPN transistor, contact wetting current 5mA, input debounce 0.5 second Relay output contacts, normally open, AC1 5A 250V AC3 2A 250V, 5A 120V DC1 5A 30V, 5A 20V DC3 2A 30V, 5A 20V FET output, 30 VDC 500mA max. Uses DI1. Max rate 100Hz, min. off-time 5msec. Uses DI1-4. Max rate of DI1 is 1000Hz, min. off-time 0.5msec Max rate of DI2-4 is 100Hz, min. off-time 5msec. FET output, 30 VDC 500mA max Max rate for 105-1 is100 Hz. Max rate for 105-3 is 1000 Hz. Pulse signal recreated, pulse rate avail. on analogue

(scaling configurable). Divide-by-10 available for 1000Hz inputs. output, floating differential input, common mode voltage -0.5V to 27V. 24 VDC for powering external loops provided, 150 mA max. Resolution 15 bit, Accuracy 10 bit, Digital filter time constant 1 second (config.) Configurable high & low set-points, allowing set/reset of remote digital outputs current sink to common, max loop voltage 27V, man_905_2.0.doc Page 47 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual System Parameters Network Configurations Mapping User Configuration Diagnostics On board diagnostics 105-2 None 105-3 Eight 0-20mA Resolution 15 bit Accuracy 10 bit (0.016mA) Up to 95 radio units with up to 32 serial units off each radio unit Communications via radio or RS485 or network of both Any input to any output in system Via on-board DIP switches or RS232 terminal or laptop Automatic check on start-

up Via RS232 laptop terminal or Input status Output test Incoming radio signal level Simple radio path testing Page 48 March 2000 Chapter Six Troubleshooting Chapter Six TROUBLESHOOTING 6.1 INDICATOR OK LED OFF OK LED ON PWR LED ON TX LED ON RX LED ON RX LED ON RX LED ON No transmission on change of state Diagnostics Chart CONDITION Continuously Continuously Continuously Flashes briefly Flashes briefly Flashes continuously Continuously MEANING Battery Voltage low CPU failure

+24V supply failure/overload Normal Operation Supply available from SUP1/SUP2 Supply available from solar panel Radio transmitting Radio Receiving Serial port communicating Module in Configuration Mode Test Button press in Configuration Mode Unit not configured correctly - re-

configure and check operation The green OK LED on the front panel indicates correct operation of the unit. This LED extinguishes on failure as described above. When the OK LED extinguishes shutdown state is indicated. In this state, all digital outputs turn OFF and the +24V supply turns off. On processor failure, or on failure during start-up diagnostics, the unit shuts down, and remains in shutdown until the fault is rectified. The unit also shuts down if the battery voltage falls below 10.8 volts. This is a protection feature designed to protect the battery from deep discharge in case of extended period without supply voltage. 6.2 Self Test Functions 6.2.1 Input to Output Reflection (105-1 only) The unit will require re-configuration after SELF TEST. Ensure you know the required operational configuration including system and unit addresses so that the network can be restored after testing. Remove the cover in the front panel, and set the DIP switches as shown below. Hold down the red button for five seconds, or until the Rx LED glows yellow, release the Red button (the Rx LED now flashes), then press and release the Red button (the flashing Rx LED extinguishes). man_905_2.0.doc Page 49 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Input signals may now be connected to the input terminals of the module. If the module is operating correctly, then the input signals will be reflected to the corresponding output on the same module. For example, if DI 1 is connected to common - i.e. the first digital input is turned "ON" - then DO 1 will activate, if the module is functional. Similarly, if a 12mA signal is connected to AI 2, then a 12mA signal should be able to be measured from AO 2, if the module is functioning correctly. If a module does not pass its self test function, then it should be returned to an authorised service agent for attention 6.2.2 Radio Testing using Tone Reversals This function allows the unit to be configured to continuously transmit a sequence of alternate zeros and ones on the radio. This function provides the facility to check VSWR of aerials during installation, as well as checking the fade margin of the path between two units (see below - received signal strength indication). The tone reversals function is initiated by setting all of the DIL switches to ON, and holding down the red button for approximately 5 seconds( until the RX LED lights continuously). On releasing the button, the RX LED will flash continuously, and the TX LED will light, indicating that the radio transmitter is on. 6.2.3 Diagnostics menu To aid in the checking and set-up of the 105 unit, a user friendly menu provides access to diagnostic functions in the 105. Use of the diagnostics menu does not affect module configuration. To access these diagnostics, a terminal must be connected to the serial port on the unit. The terminal may be a standalone terminal, or a personal computer running terminal emulation software. The terminal or terminal emulation software must be set-up for 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity. The menu is accessed by connecting a terminal to the serial (DB9 RS-232) port on the 105 (ensure the RS485 port is disconnected), setting all switches to 0, and holding down the red button for approximately 5 seconds, until the RX LED lights continuously. One of the following menus will be displayed on the terminal :

Page 50 March 2000 Chapter Six 105 V1.0 Ins a) Tones Comms DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 AO1 AO2 Switch Signal b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k)

1052 V1.0 Digital Inputs Analogue Inputs Tones Comms DO1 Switch Signal a) b) c) d) e) f) g)

Troubleshooting 1053 V1.0 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) l) m) n) o) p) q) r) s) t) u)

Ins Tones Comms DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 DO8 AO1 AO2 AO3 AO4 AO5 AO6 AO7 AO8 Switch Signal Choose an item from the menu by entering the letter before that item. For example, to select the

"Comms" function from the 105-2 Menu, enter :- d Inputs This option provides a dynamic display of the status of all of the inputs in the 105, both internal and external. 105-1 Modules 1234MLS 0101001 P CNT 00F6 AI1 C000 AI2 4000 P RATE VBATT 8000 9C00 The first 7 values (1234MLS) each represent a single digital input. A 1 indicates that that input is ON, and a 0 indicates that the corresponding input is OFF. "1234" represents the four physical digital inputs, DI1 to DI4. "M" is the mains fail status (1 for mains fail, 0 for mains OK). "L" is the battery low volts status (1 for low volts 0 for OK). "S" is the set-point status. P CNT, AI1, AI2, P RATE, and VBATT each represent 16 bit values, displayed as four hexadecimal digits. P CNT is the current value of the pulsed input counter. This value should increment each time DI 1 turns from OFF to ON. P RATE displays the current pulse rate at DI1. This value is scaled according to the MAXRATE value configured (0 Hertz is displayed as 4000, and the maximum rate is displayed as C000). man_905_2.0.doc Page 51 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual AI1 and AI2 represent the value for the two analogue inputs. Full scale input (20 mA) is displayed as C000, 4mA is displayed as 4000, and 0ma is displayed as 2000. Analogue inputs are filtered digitally with a time constant of 1 second, so a sudden change in the analogue input current will result in a slower change in displayed analogue value, finally settling at the new value. A guide to translate the displayed value to the analogue input current is provided below. Add together the figures corresponding to each digit in each position to determine e.g. displayed value 3456 = 2.000+0.500+0.039+0.003 the current (mA)

= 2.542mA Digit Leftmost position Next position Next position Rightmost 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

0.000 2.000 4.000 6.000 8.000 10.000 12.000 14.000 16.000 18.000 20 22

0.000 0.125 0.250 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 0.875 1.000 1.125 1.250 1.375 1.500 1.625 1.750 1.875 0.000 0.008 0.016 0.023 0.031 0.039 0.047 0.055 0.063 0.070 0.078 0.086 0.094 0.102 0.109 0.117 position 0.000 0.000 0.001 0.001 0.002 0.002 0.003 0.003 0.004 0.004 0.005 0.005 0.006 0.006 0.007 0.007 VBATT is the current internally derived battery voltage. 4000 corresponds to 8 Volts, C000 represents 16 volts. A quicker method is use the calculation :

Battery voltage (volts) = I + 6, where I is the mA value determined from the above table using VBATT. For example, a value of VBATT of A000 gives an I value of 16mA from the above table. The battery voltage corresponding to this is 14V (or x 16 + 6). 105-2 Modules Digital Inputs DIN SETPNT PULSED 1234MSL123456 0000100111111 PIN1 0000 PIN2 0000 PIN3 0000 PIN4 0000 Page 52 March 2000 Chapter Six Troubleshooting AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6 0D3A 0CD2 0CC7 0CC7 0CD4 0CC7 Analogue Inputs VBAT PR1 PR2 PR3 8138 4000 105-3 Modules 4000 4000 PR4 4000 ML VBAT VSLR 00 9FA2 0000 Tones This provides the same function as described above in 6.2.2. Tone Reversals. This function may be used to check VSWR of aerials, and may be used in conjunction with the Signal option (described below) to check the path between two 105 units. Comms This function allows monitoring of all messages transmitted and received over the radio. Transmitted messages are displayed starting in the leftmost column of the display. Received messages are displayed indented by one space. Received messages which have been corrupted are displayed with a '*' in the first column of the display. The first four hexadecimal digits are the system address attached to the message, and must match for units to communicate successfully. Example (105-1):

>c Comms 01FA8106008005C672D4F1

*01FA8186C6B5A7 01FA8106008005C672D4F1 01FA818600B5A7

*01FB86010080010000FEC2 01FA86010080010000FEC2 01FA868100332F DO1 to DO8 Command message transmitted by this unit. Corrupt Acknowledge received from remote. Message re-transmitted by this unit. (no Ack) Valid Acknowledge received from remote. Corrupt message received from remote unit. Re-sent message received from remote unit. Acknowledge message from this unit to remote. These options allow the user to set and clear digital outputs. To set an output, select the corresponding menu item, at the prompt, type the value FFFF to turn the output ON, or 0000 to turn the output OFF. For example, to set DO1 ON,

>e DO1

>FFFF man_905_2.0.doc Page 53 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual AO1 to AO8 These options allow the user to set analogue outputs to any value. To set the output, select the corresponding menu item. At the prompt type the value required for the analogue output as a four digit hexadecimal value. Refer to the table above for analogue current/expected value relationship. To set AO2 on 105-3 to 19 mA :

>m AO2

>B800 Switch This option allows testing of the DIL (Dual In Line) switches used for the configuration of the module. The diagram below indicates the layout of the switches of which there are two sets of eight, with an Enter button located to the right of the pair. the display indicates the current switch settings with the digit 1 corresponding to On and the digit O corresponding to Off. Changing the switch settings in this mode will change the display. Test each switch and check to ensure the display changes accordingly. When the Enter button is pressed, regardless of the previous switch setting, switches 1, 5, 9 and 13 will display as a 1 O X Switches 1 or 0 Button Not Pressed =

Pressed =

Switches 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Displayed 1110001001010101 O X 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1110101011011101

1 5 9 13

Signal This option provides for testing the radio path between two 105-U units for a suitable fade margin. Although a pair of units may communicate successfully, radio communication may be affected by a Page 54 March 2000

Chapter Six Troubleshooting range of influences, including atmospheric conditions, changing landscape, degradation of aerials or co-axial cable, low battery voltage etc. Fade margin is an indication of how far a radio path can deteriorate before communication becomes unreliable. When using the Signal feature, a meter is displayed with a mark indicating the current received radio signal level. To check the radio path between two units, select the signal option at the local unit. The remote unit may then be set up for tone reversals (refer 1 above) and the signal level read from the meter. A simpler method when remote units are not easily accessible is to cause a transmission from the local unit to the remote unit (by setting a digital input which maps to the remote unit, for example). The meter will latch the received signal from the remote unit for half a second, allowing the received level to be read. Under normal radio conditions, a reading of 0 indicates a very marginal communication path. For reliable communications, the signal reading should be 3 or above. Minimum signal level for reliable comms

>k Signal 0123456789----

In areas experiencing radio interference or high background noise, reliable communications may not be achievable even with this signal level. To determine if interference is occurring the signal option may be selected without any other 105 units active. In a normal radio environment, no reading should be displayed. If a reading is displayed, then the received signal strength from the remote should be at least three counts higher than the background noise for reliable communication. Displayed signal level of background noise/interference Minimum signal level for reliable comms

>k Signal 0123456789----

>k Signal 0123456789----

When using directional aerials (i.e. YAGI aerials) this feature may be used to peak the received signal level. Set-up the remote unit to transmit tone reversals as described above, and observe the signal indication while adjusting the orientation of the aerial. A peak in signal level indicates optimum orientation of the aerial. man_905_2.0.doc Page 55 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Chapter Seven WARRANTY & SERVICE We are pleased that you have purchased this product. Your purchase is guaranteed against defects for a 365 day warranty period, commencing from the date of purchase. This warranty does not extend to:

Failures caused by the operation of the equipment outside the particular product's specification. use of the 105 module not in accordance with this User Manual, or abuse, misuse, neglect or damage by external causes, or repairs, alterations, or modifications undertaken other than by an authorised Service Agent. Full product specifications and maintenance instructions are available from your Service Agent, your source of purchase, or from the master distributor in your country upon request and should be noted if you are in any doubt about the operating environment for your equipment purchase In the unlikely event of your purchase being faulty, your warranty extends to free repair or replacement of the faulty unit, after its receipt at the master distributor in your country. Our warranty does not include transport or insurance charges relating to a warranty claim. This warranty does not indemnify the purchaser of products for any consequential claim for damages or loss of operations or profits. Should you wish to make a warranty claim, or obtain service, please forward the module to the nearest authorised Service Agent along with proof of purchase. For details of authorised Service Agents, contact your sales distributor. Page 56 March 2000 Appendix A System Example Appendix A SYSTEM EXAMPLE The following example of a system is a comprehensive guide to using some of the features of the 105 range and design of 105 system. The example application is a pump station which supplies water from a reservoir to a tank station. Signals are transferred between the pump station and tank station by radio - the distance between the two stations is 1.5 km (1 mile), and the radio path is heavily obstructed by buildings and trees. A control station is located near the pump station, and there is an existing signal cable between the control station and the pump station. A 105U-1 module is installed at the pump station (with address 1) and a 105U-2 module is installed at the tank station (with address 2). Because the signal cable to the control station does not have enough cores for all of the signals required, the signal cable is used as a RS485 cable and a 105S-3 module is installed at the control station (with address 96). As this module has an address greater than 95, the 105U-1 at the pump station will communicate to it via its serial port. The following diagram represents the system :-

man_905_2.0.doc Page 57 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual The following design points should be noted :-

A test of the radio path between the pump station and the tank station indicated that the radio path would be reliable provided aerials were installed at 6 m above the ground. At each site, the coaxial cable would be approx 10 m in length, so it was decided to use 3 element Yagi aerials with RG58 coaxial cable - the Yagi aerials would compensate for the loss in the cable. The system was installed in a country which permitted the use of 500mW radio power. If this had not been the case, then an intermediate repeater station would have been required. At the tank station, there was an existing light pole with a mains power supply - the light pole was 10m high. Permission was obtained to mount the aerial from the pole and to use the power supply for the radio telemetry module. As there was no existing electrical panel at this station, a small steel enclosure was installed on the light pole. A 2 Amp-Hour sealed battery was installed to provide power during any mains failure. The flow and level transducer were powered from the 24VDC loop supply provided by the 105 module. At the pump station, the aerial was mounted on a 3 m J-bracket installed on the roof of the pump station building. The final height of the aerial was approx 6 m. Care was taken to align the Yagi aerials so they pointed at each other. The Yagi aerials were installed with horizontal polarity

- that is, with the elements horizontal. These aerials will not "hear" other radio users on the same radio channel which generally use vertical polarity. There was an existing electrical enclosure at the pump station, and the 105U module was installed inside this enclosure. The module was powered from 220VAC mains with a 2 Amp Hour sealed battery as backup. At the control station, the 105S module was installed inside the existing control panel enclosure. The module was powered from an existing 24VDC power supply. Page 58 March 2000 Appendix A System Example Tank Station Configuration The 105U-2 module has the following configuration :-

Note the following points in the configuration :

The configuration software used was CFG105-2.EXE as the module is a 105U-2. The system address is 10587 (a random selection) and unit address is 2. PIN1 (the flow meter) is mapped to Out3 (D/P output 3) at #96 which is the control station -

#1 is a repeater. The pulse rate for this PIN (PLSR1) is mapped to Out2 at #97 via #1. This is AO2 of the 105S-3 at the control station. Remember that the 105S-3 has two addresses - the lower address is used for the digital outputs, and the higher address is used for the analogue outputs. man_905_2.0.doc Page 59 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual The pulse rate scaling for PIN1 has been set to 5 Hz to match the maximum flow rate of the flow meter. Note that PIN1 has not been configured for "divide by 10" (for 1000 Hz pulse signals). AIN1 (the level transducer) is mapped to Out1 at #97 via #1. The analogue debounce has been set to 2 sec. This is to avoid any wave action on the surface of the tank causing un-necessary change transmissions. This debounce time will also operate on the PLSR1 value, but as the flow rate changes slowly, this will not affect the performance of this signal. SETPT1 (the set-point status for AI1) is mapped to Out2 (DO2) of #1 (pump station). The set-

point values for SETPT1 have been set to 40% and 75%. When the tank level drops to 40%, DO2 at the pump station will activate to start the pump. When the level rises above 75%, DO2 will reset to stop the pump. The update time for SETPT1 has been changed to 5 minute, as required. An additional mapping has been entered - LOW VOLT has been mapped to Out7 at #96 via

#1 (DO7 at the control station). This mapping is for future use - it will provide a low battery voltage alarm for the tank station. The update time for this mapping has been set to the maximum time of 15 minutes to reduce loading of the radio channel. A Start-up poll has been configured for #1, as DO1 at the tank station is controlled from the pump station. Note that no comms fail reset time has been configured for DO1. As this output drives an indication only, the indication will show the last correct status even during communication failures. Pump Station Configuration The 105U-1 module has the following configuration :-

Page 60 March 2000 Appendix A System Example Note the following points in the configuration :

The configuration software used was CFG105-1.EXE as the module is a 105U-1. The system address is 10587 (same as before) and unit address is 1. DIN1 (pump fault signal) is mapped to Out1 (DO1) at #96 which is the control station. Note that no repeater address is necessary as there is a direct link between #1 and #96. DIN2 (pump running signal) has two mappings - a mapping to DO1 at #2 (tank station) and DO2 at #96 (control station). When DIN2 changes, there will be two separate change messages transmitted - one by radio to #2 and one by serial link to #96. AIN1 (pump amps) is mapped to Out3 at #97 (AO3 at control station). An additional mapping has been entered - LOW VOLT has been mapped to Out8 at #96

(DO8 at the control station). This mapping is for future use - it will provide a low battery voltage alarm for the pump station. A Start-up poll has been configured for #2, as DO2 at the pump station is controlled from the tank station. Note that a comms fail reset time of 11 minutes has been configured for DO2. This means that if a message has not been received for DO2 within 11 minutes, DO2 will reset and switch off the pump. The 11 min time was chosen as it means that two successive update messages have to be missed before the pump is reset, and there is no problems if the pump runs for 11 minutes during a system failure (the tank will not overflow during this time). man_905_2.0.doc Page 61 105 Radio/Serial Telemetry Module User Manual Control Station Configuration The 105S-3 module has the following configuration :-

Note the following points in the configuration :

The configuration software used was CFG105-3.EXE as the module is a 105S-3. The system address is 10587 (same as before) and unit address is 96. As the module is a 105-3 module, it will automatically assume addresses #96 and #97. The only mappings are Start-up polls. Note that there are two separate polls, one for each remote module. D/P Out 3 has been configured as a PO. Its pulse output update time is the same as the PI update time at the remote module (both have been left at their default value of 1 minute). Comms fail reset times have been selected for the analogue outputs (21 minutes) but not the Page 62 March 2000 Appendix A System Example digital outputs. In the event of a system failure, the digital outputs will stay at their last correct status, but the analogue outputs will reset to 0 mA. System Failure Alarm After the system had been running for some time, the operators wanted a "system failure" output at the control station, to warn the operators that there was a fault with the system. The following configuration was added :

At #2 (tank station), NOT DI4 Out4 at 96 via 1 ; DI4 Update time = 1 minute At #96 (control station), DO4 Comms fail reset time = 3.5 min At the control station, DO4 was a "system OK" signal. It was normally active - if the signal reset, then this represented a system failure. At the tank station, there is no signal wired to DI4. By mapping NOT DI4 to DO4 at the control station, a message is transmitted every minute to this output to activate it. The message is transmitted via the radio link to #1, and then by the serial link to #96. If anything happened to either module #2 or module #1, or the radio link, or the serial link, then the update messages for DO4 will not be received at the control station module. After 3.5 Minutes, DO4 will reset indicating a problem. The time of 3.5 minutes was selected as this means that 3 successive update messages have to be missed before a system alarm occurs. Also note, that if module #96 fails, DO4 will reset and give an alarm signal. man_905_2.0.doc Page 63